Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Important Handling Information.....................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................117
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................267
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................215
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................229
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................269
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................325
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................373
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................377
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................359
2003 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................59
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33S9VC00
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Headings
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident.
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
230
261
Off-Highway Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iii
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
2
INDICATOR LIGHTS
GAUGES
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
MIRROR
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUDIO SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.61)
(P.67)
(P.82)
(P.103)
(P.99)
(P.218)
(P.110)
(P.118, 128)
(P.137, 153, 168)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE
(P.217)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
(P.104)
REAR A/C CONTROL
(P.135)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
Main Menu
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
CRUISE
CONTROL
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
(P.112)
(P.72/74)
(P.207)
(P.188) (P.78)
(P.74/76)
HORN HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.77)
(P.238)
(P.77)
(P.207)
VTM-4 LOCK
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10
..........................Head Restraints . 10
..................................Door Locks . 10
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11
............................Protecting Adults . 12
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 14
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 15
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 18
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 21
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 22
The Passenger’s Airbag Poses
......Serious Risks to Children . 23
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 25
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 25
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 26
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.........Protecting Small Children . 35
.......Protecting Larger Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 42
.............................Using LATCH . 44
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 46
..Seat Belt System Components . 46
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 48
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 49
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 50
........................SRS Components . 50
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 50
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 52
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 53
How The Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 54
.............................Airbag Service . 55
...Additional Safety Precautions . 55
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
...................................Safety Labels . 57
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in a back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your vehicle is
equipped with airbags, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear your seat belts, and wear them
properly. (See page .)15
9
21
272
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear your seat belts
properly.
7
(7)
(10)
(9) (3) (1) (4)
(2)
(6)(10)
(7) (8)
(5)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your vehicle is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with dual-
stage, dual-threshold front airbags to
help protect the heads and chests of
the driver and a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is moving.
Your vehicle’s seats are designed to
keep you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthevehicle,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the vehicle during a crash. It also
helps prevent occupants from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out, and outsiders from
unexpectedly opening your doors.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seats & Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Door Locks
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
What you should do:
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your vehicle’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
in a back seat (see page ).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Alldoorsandthetailgateare
closed and locked (see page ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
15
22
12
13
14
12
225
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
monitor light on the instrument
panel to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the vehicle is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the vehicle during a crash.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate are closed and locked.
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
38
82
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the vehicle. Also make
sure your front seat passenger
moves the seat as far to the rear as
possible.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel.Alsomakesureyourfront
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
89
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
13
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
90
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
14
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjusttheseat-backtoan
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
thebeltsothelappartfitssnugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
In the second row center seat and
thethirdrowseats,besurethe
detachable anchors are also latched
(see page ).
Check that the seat belt is not
twisted, because a twisted belt can
cause serious injuries in a crash.
97
93
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
To adjust the height of a front seat
belt anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
16
RELEASE
BUTTON
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
46
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the vehicle,
or by being struck by an inflating
front airbag. Being struck by an
inflating side airbag can result in
possibly serious injuries.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your vehicle’s
airbags and other safety features,
you must sit properly and wear your
seat belt properly.
78
Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6. 7.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
All passengers
must sit in locked, upright seats
andbeproperlyrestrainedbyseat
belts.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
CONTINUED
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag covers in the center of the
steering wheel and on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the airbags inflate.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
20
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers. (See page
.)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
(See page .)
26
38
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
In a back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your vehicle crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, in a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Infants
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
U.S. Models Canadian Models
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
24
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Using this feature will
prevent children from opening the
doors and accidentally falling out
(see page ).
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If you ever have to carry a group of
children (when carpooling for
example), and a child must ride in
front:
Using
this feature will prevent children
from playing with the windows,
which could expose them to
hazards or distract the driver (see
page ).
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the tailgate, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
12
15
38
18
87
99
CONTINUED
Additional Safety PrecautionsIf a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Use the main power window
switch to prevent children from
opening the rear windows.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box. 30
Infants:
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
1.
2.
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your vehicle.
35
Small Children:
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a front-
facing child seat (see page ).
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your vehicle.
36
31
36
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Back Seats
Infants:
Small children:
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the vehicle during
a crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt. Some child seats
can be secured to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system instead.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
, and for instructions on
howtoproperlysecurechildseats
in this vehicle.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
31 4436
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
In this vehicle, a rear-facing child
seatcanbeplacedinanyseating
positioninabackseat,butnotinthe
front seat.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
30
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a rear-
facing child seat with this type of
seat belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
If you have a child seat designed
to attach to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
Before installing a child seat in the
center seat of the second row or
one of the third row seats, make
sure the seat belt detachable
anchor is latched (see page ).
1.
2. 3.
44
97
CONTINUED
Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat
with a Lap/Shoulder Belt
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4.
5. 6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat in another
back seating position, or leave the
affected seat unoccupied. If the
problem cannot be solved, you may
wish to get a smaller rear-facing
child seat.
12
13
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In this vehicle, the best place to
install a forward-facing child seat is
in one of the seating positions in a
back seat.We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
A child at least one year old who can
sit up without support, and who fits
within the child seat maker’s weight
and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
CONTINUED
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lap/shoulder belts in the outer
back and front passenger seating
positions have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
If you have a child seat designed
to attach to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system,
follow the instructions on page
.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Before installing a child seat in the
center seat of the second row or
one of the third row seats, make
sure the seat belt detachable
anchor is latched (see page ).
1.
2.
44
97
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
3.
4.
5. 6.
CONTINUED
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child restraint system, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
We recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
Protecting Larger Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible,
uses a booster seat if needed,
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
sit in the rear seat, all the way back
against the seat, and put on the seat
belt. Follow the instructions on page
. Then check how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, and
the lap belt rests over the child’s
hipbones and touches the tops of the
thighs as shown, the child is
probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt
touchesorcrossesthechild’sneck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
This could result in serious neck and
internal injuries during a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
15
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck or over the stomach.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a high or low-
back style that allows the child to be
directly secured with the lap/
shoulder belt.
A child should continue using a
booster seat until the child exceeds
the booster seat manufacturer’s
requirements.
Even then, the child may still need to
use a booster seat. Note that some
states now require children to use
boosters until they reach a certain
ageand/orweight.Besuretocheck
current laws in the state or states
where you intend to drive.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Using a Booster Seat
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Remind the child not to lean
toward the door because of the
side airbag.
15 39
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has attachment points
for a tether-style child seat to be
installed on the second or third row
as shown.
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seat
back.
There are three anchorage points on
the tailgate sill. Select the anchorage
point you want to use, and slide the
cover to open it (outboard anchor),
or remove the cover (center anchor).
Second Seat Installation: Third Seat Installation:
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lift the head restraint, then route
the tether strap over the seat-back
between the legs of the head
restraint.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether attachment point, and tighten
the strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the child seat in a second row
vehicle seat and attach the child
seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the second
row seats. The lower anchors are
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom and are to be used only
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
The exact location of each lower
anchorage is marked with a small
circle above the lower anchorage
point.
Move the seat belt buckle or seat
belt tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
1.
2.
3.
Using LATCH
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
LOWER
ANCHORS
RIGID TYPE
MARKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
Attach the attaching clip to the
tether anchor fitting and tighten
the strap according to the child
seat maker’s instructions. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
This symbol on rear or forward
facing child seats or booster
cushions indicates the presence of
LATCH compatible hardware.
4. 5.
6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lower Universal Anchorage
System Symbol
45
FLEXIBLE TYPE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The lap/shoulder belts goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all eight seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The lap/shoulder belts in the center
seat of the second row and third row
seats are equipped with a detachable
anchor that has two parts: a small
latch plate and a buckle.
The detachable anchor should
normally be latched whenever the
seats-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable anchors, see page .97
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
Guide the belt across your body so
that it retracts completely. After
exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt
is out of the way and will not get
closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body. 15
31 36
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your airbags inflate, the tensioners
immediately tighten the front seat
belts to help hold the occupants in
place. The belts will remain tight
until you unbuckle them in the
normal way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
Your vehicle has automatic seat belt
tensioners for added protection
during a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
53
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
48
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
329
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
U.S. Models
49
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Automatic seat belt tensioners
that tighten the front seat belts in
the event of a moderate to severe
frontal collision (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
stage, dual-threshold airbags to help
reduce the chance of airbag-caused
injuries.
48
53
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
The SRS indicator light
alerts you to a potential
problem with your front airbags and
automatic seat belt tensioners.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
This light will also alert you to a
potential problem with your side
airbags or passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system (see page
).
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
54
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’t
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
62
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
54
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your vehicle serviced if:
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
224
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the under-
side.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
56
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
U.S. models only U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DASHBOARD
BATTERY LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
58
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 60
...............................Indicator Lights . 61
.............................................Gauges . 67
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 71
...................................Headlights . 72
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 73
............Daytime Running Lights . 73
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 73
................................Turn Signals . 74
.....................Windshield Wipers . 74
..................Windshield Washers . 76
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 76
..........................Hazard Warning . 76
.............Rear Window Defogger . 77
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78
...............................Keys and Locks . 79
..............................................Keys . 79
....................Immobilizer System . 80
............................Ignition Switch . 81
......................Power Door Locks . 82
...................Remote Transmitter . 84
..............Childproof Door Locks . 87
........................................Tailgate . 87
....................................Glove Box . 88
.................................................Seats . 89
............Power Seat Adjustments . 89
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 90
..........Manual Seat Adjustments . 91
Second and Third Row seat
............................Adjustments . 92
..........................Head Restraints . 93
........................Rear Seat Access . 94
............Folding the Second Seat . 94
...............Folding the Third Seat . 95
...................Detachable Anchors . 97
....................................Seat Heaters . 98
..............................Power Windows . 99
...........................................Mirrors . 102
...............................Parking Brake . 104
...........................Beverage Holder . 105
.................Console Compartment . 107
.................................Cargo Hooks . 107
........................Sunglasses Holder . 108
........................................Sun Visor . 109
................................Vanity Mirror . 109
............Accessory Power Sockets . 110
........................................Coin Box . 111
......................................Coat Hook . 111
...............................Interior Lights . 112
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
60
INDICATOR LIGHTS (P.61)
GAUGES(P.67)
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.82)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUDIO SYSTEM
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.103)
(P.99)
(P.218)
(P.110)
(P.137, 153. 168)
(P.118, 128)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE
(P.217)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
(P.104)
REAR A/C CONTROL
(P.135)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
CONTINUED
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
61
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
(P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.62)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.62)
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR
(P.64)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62)
VTM-4 INDICATOR
(P.66)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
(P.65)
A/T TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(P.66)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
(P.69)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P.65)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.65)
BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR(P.64)
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
(P.62)
(P.349)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system
or automatic seat belt tensioners.
For complete information, see page
.
See page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
53
54
349
347
348
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
62
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page .
This light has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
1.
2.
80
351
242
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
63
U.S. Canada CanadaU.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the vehicle should flash.
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the tailgate or any door
is not closed tightly.
All the lights in the monitor display
come on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II).
If a brake light does not work, the
indicator comes on
when you push the brake pedal with
the ignition switch ON (II).
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
318
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Door and Tailgate Open MonitorBrake Lamp Indicator
64
BRAKE LAMP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only Canadian models only
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
72
73
207
292
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. The indicator
should come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
ON (II). If it comes on while driving,
it indicates the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If this light
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the 4WD system. Take
the vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
A/T Temperature
Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
66
Continuing to drive with the A/T
Temperature indicator lit may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Speedometer
Odometer
Tachometer
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
TRIP METER
SELECT/RESET
BUTTON
TRIP METER
ODOMETER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the outside temperature
display (EX model only) by pressing
the Select/Reset button repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset if
the vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle white mark. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper white mark. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
345
Trip Meter Fuel Gauge
Temperature Gauge
Instruments and Controls
Gauges
68
TRIP METER SELECT/
RESET BUTTON
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages and .
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
Press and hold the Select/Reset
button on the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Hold the button for approximately
ten seconds until the indicator
resets.
1.
2.
3.
274 276
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Required Indicator
69
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.
models, and in Centigrade in
Canadian models. To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset button until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is located in
the front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road sur-
face, engine heat, and the exhaust
from surrounding traffic. This can
cause an incorrect temperature read-
ing when your speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h).
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
On EX model
Instruments and Controls
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
70
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The switches for the hazard warning
lights and rear window defogger are
located to the right of the steering
column.
The tilt adjustment lever on the left
side of the steering column allows
you to tilt the steering wheel.
To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
71
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.72/74)
VTM-4 LOCK
(P.77)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.78)
HORN
(P.74/76)
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
HAZARD
WARNING
LIGHTS
CRUISE CONTROL
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE
CONTROL
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.112)
(P.207)
(P.188)
(P.207)
(P.238)
(P.77)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
To change from low beams to high
beams, push the turn signal lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will light
(see page ). To return to low
beams, pull the turn signal lever
back.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.65
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Headlights
72
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, open,
then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, fog lights,
parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate lights and
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds of removing the key from
the ignition switch and closing the
driver’s door.
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
On EX model
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
Instrument Panel Brightness
73
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions:
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
Turn Signals Windshield Wipers
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
74
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
You can vary how often the wipers
sweep the windshield by turning the
INT TIME ring next to the rotary
switch.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. The sweep
interval will change slightly with
speed; getting shorter as you drive
faster. In low speed and high speed,
the wipers run continuously.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
To turn on the rear window wiper,
turn the rotary switch clockwise to
ON. To also use the rear window
washer, turn the rotary switch
clockwise past ON. The washer will
spray as long as you hold the rotary
switch in this position. If you turn the
rotary switch counterclockwise from
the OFF position, the washer will
spray without activating the rear
window wiper.
Pushtheredbuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
Hazard WarningRear Window Wiper and WasherWindshield Washers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window defogger will clear
fog,frost,andthinicefromthe
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light above
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
Rear Window Defogger
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
77
EX model
LX model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
3.
4.
1.
2.
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
18
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
78
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle:
• Ignition
• Driver’s Door
•Glovebox
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keepthegloveboxlockedwhenyou
leave your vehicle and valet key at a
parking facility.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Your vehicle also comes with two
remote transmitters; see page for
an explanation of their operation.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number plate with your keys. You
will need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
the plate stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
84
CONTINUED
Keys
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Remote Transmitter
79
KEY
NUMBER
PLATE
MASTER
KEYS
(BLACK)
VALET KEY
(GRAY)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
vehicle’s key and the ignition
switch while trying to start the
engine.
The Immobilizer System indicator
will also blink several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
80
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. The shift lever
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column
when you remove the key.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
LOCK (0)Ignition Switch
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
− Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the lights on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY to ON.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
Each front door has a master door
lock switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
Push the top of the switch to unlock
all doors and the tailgate, and the
bottom to lock them.
80
START (III) Power Door Locks
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
82
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each door has a lock tab on the top.
Whenyoupushdownthelocktabon
the driver’s door, all the doors and
the tailgate lock. Pulling up the lock
tab on the driver’s door unlocks only
that door. The lock tabs on the other
doors lock and unlock only that door.
To lock the front passenger’s door
when getting out of the vehicle, push
the lock tab down and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, along with
the remaining doors and the tailgate,
push the lock tab down or push the
master switch down, then close the
door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door. To unlock
only the driver’s door from the
outside, turn the key and release it.
If you turn the key and hold it, all
doors and the tailgate will unlock. All
four doors and the tailgate will
unlock when you unlock the
passenger’s door with the key.
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
andthekeyintheignition,both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pushing down the
lock tab, the tabs on all doors pop out.
Pushingdownthelocktabonthe
passenger’s door only locks that door.
Lockout Prevention
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can lock and unlock your vehicle
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
and the tailgate lock. The parking
lights, side marker lights, taillights
and instrument panel lights flash
once.
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds after
you have locked the doors, you will
hear a beep to verify that the
security system has set.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you push the button a
second time. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights flash twice
when you push the button.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 10
seconds, then go out. If you relock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
remote transmitter before 10
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, all doors
and the tailgate automatically relock.
You cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
if any door or the tailgate is not fully
closed. You cannot lock or unlock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
key in the ignition switch.
112
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Remote Transmitter
84
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your vehicle’s horn and
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights will flash for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode,pressandholdthePANIC
button for about one second.
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate, and the LED will get dim.
Replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR2025
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
key is in the ON (II) position.
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the trans-
mitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
CONTINUED
Panic Mode Replacing the Battery
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
ROUND
COVER
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
◎
▽
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Align the mark on the cover
with the mark on the
transmitter, then set the cover in
place and turn it clockwise.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your vehicle’s
system by your Honda dealer. Any
other transmitters you have will also
need to be reprogrammed.
Transmitter Care
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
86
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for information on
cargo loading. Keep the tailgate
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and to
prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See
on page .
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up the tailgate.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle.
To close the tailgate, use the inner
handle to pull the tailgate down, then
press down on the back edge.
56
225
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Childproof Door Locks Tailgate
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
LOCK LEVER HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
88
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
The long horizontal switch adjusts
the seat bottom in several directions.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
The EX model has a power
adjustable driver’s seat. The two
power seat adjustment switches are
on the outside edge of the seat
bottom. All other seats in the EX
model have manual adjustments.
All seats in the LX model adjust
manually.
You can adjust the power seat with
the ignition switch in any position.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
12 13
CONTINUED
Power Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
89
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
On EX model
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Seats
Instruments and Controls
90
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethelever.Trytomovethe
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seats, pull up on the lever on
the outside of the seat bottom.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
12 13
Manual Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To adjust the seat-back angle of the
third seat, pull on the handle on the
back of the seat-back, move the seat-
back to the desired position, and
release the handle. Let the seat-back
latch in the new position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on
thehandleontheoutsideoftheseat-
back.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the front of the seat bottom, and turn
the rear dial to raise the rear.
On LX model
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Second and Third Row Seat
Adjustments
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
92
SECOND
SEAT
THIRD
SEAT
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
14
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions.
The head restraints in the second
and third row seats adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. To raise it, pull upward. To
lower the restraint, push the release
button sideways and push the
restraint down.
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
93
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get into the third row seats, pull
uptheleveronthesideofthe
passenger’s side second row seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and the seat will slide forward.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
The left and right halves of the
second seat can be folded up
separately to create more cargo
space.
If you are folding the left half of
the seat, use the ignition key to
release the center seat belt from
the detachable anchor. Allow the
seat belt to retract into the roof.
Insert the latch plate into the roof
holder.
Fold the seat-back forward.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
(Left half) Remove the center seat
belt from its holder in the roof, and
connect it to the detachable anchor
(see page ).
Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
2.
3.
1.
4.
97
Rear Seat Access Folding the Second Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
94
HANDLE
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store the head restraints in the
storage compartment under the
cargo area floor. Insert the shafts
of the head restraints into the
holes in the sides of the storage
compartment.
Use the ignition key to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor.
To create more cargo space, you can
fold the third seat forward.
To fold the third seat:
Remove the head restraints by
pushing the release buttons and
pulling the restraints out.
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Folding the Third Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure you clip the small latch
plate of each outer shoulder belt to
the seat belt webbing whenever the
third seat is folded.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
Reinstall the head restraints.
Reconnect the seat belts to the
detachable anchors.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See
on page .
4.
225
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Carrying Cargo
96
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the seat-back is returned to its
upright position, be sure to latch the
detachable anchor by lining up the
triangle marks on the small latch
plate and buckle and inserting the
plate into the buckle. Tug on the seat
belt to make sure the detachable
anchor is securely attached.
To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding down a seat-back,
insert a key into the slot on the side
of the small buckle and allow the
seat belt to retract.
Once the seat belt has completely
retracted, secure the latch plates. In
the second row, the latch plates
should be placed into their holding
slots in the ceiling. In the third row,
the small latch plate should be
clipped to the seat belt webbing.
The seat belts in the center seat of
thesecondrowandinallofthethird
row seats are equipped with a
detachable seat belt anchor that
allows the seat belt to be unlatched
when the seats are folded down.
CONTINUED
Detachable Anchors
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
SMALL LATCH PLATE
TRIANGULAR MARK
Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the passenger’s seat-back.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them. Push
the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.
On Canadian EX model with leather
seats
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
98
SEAT HEATERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s windows are
electrically-powered. Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) to raise or
lower any window.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open any of the passenger’s
windows, push down on the switch
and hold it down until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.
CONTINUED
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
99
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down and release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way down. To stop the window
from going all the way down, pull
back on the window switch briefly.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the front passenger’s window and
the rear power windows. With this
switch off, the passenger’s windows
cannot be raised or lowered. The
MAIN switch does not affect the
driver’s window. Keep the MAIN
switch off when you have children in
the vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
100
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforuptotenminutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either front door cancels
the delay function. You must turn
the ignition switch ON (II) again
before you can operate the windows.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse. You should do
the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
1.
2.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
Auto Reverse
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
102
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the driver’s
door armrest:
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Available on Canadian models
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
103
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake light on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running. (see page .)63
Instruments and Controls
Parking Brake
104
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spilled liquids can also damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the rear door pocket beverage
holders when you close the rear
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
To open the front beverage holder,
push the lock lever and slide the lid
forward.
The second row seat has a beverage
holder and tray in the center armrest.
To use it, pivot the armrest down.
CONTINUED
Beverage Holders
Instruments and Controls
Second Row Center Armrest
105
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instruments and Controls
Third Row Seat ArmrestRear Door Pocket
Beverage Holders
106
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the lid.
To close, lower the lid and push it
down until it latches.
You can store a cellular phone, a
small notepad, and business cards in
the front of the console
compartment. To open the front
door of the console compartment,
pull up the lever, and pivot the door
forward.
Console Compartment Cargo Hooks
Console Compartment, Cargo Hooks
Instruments and Controls
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
Sunglasses Holder
Instruments and Controls
108
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window. In this
position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension.
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
The light beside the mirror comes
on only when the parking lights or
headlights are on.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Instruments and Controls
109
EXTENSION
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tousethesocketintheconsole
compartment, pull the cover up.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Your vehicle has four accessory
power sockets. The front accessory
power socket is located under the
audiosystem.Twomoresocketsare
located in the center console
compartment and on the back of the
center console. The fourth socket is
behind the third seat on the driver’s
side.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
When more than one socket is being
used, the combined power rating of
the accessories should be 120 watts
or less (10 amps).
Accessory Power Sockets
Instruments and Controls
110
FRONT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The coin box is located under the
audio system. To open the coin box,
pull the bottom edge. Close it with a
firm push.
The rear socket has a maximum
power rating of 120 watts (10 amps.)
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Thesecondandthirdrowgrabrails
can also be used as coat hooks.
Instruments and Controls
Coin Box Coat Hook
Accessory Power Sockets, Coin Box, Coat Hook
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When this switch is in the OFF
position:
None of the lights come on when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off with
the switches next to the lights.
The individual map lights in the
front come on when any door or
thetailgateisopened.Whenthe
doors and the tailgate are closed,
eachlightcanbeturnedonandoff
with the switch next to the light.
When the switch is in the Door
Activated position:
The light control switch controls the
interior lights: the individual map
lights by the sun visors, and the
individual map lights above the
second and third row passengers.
This switch has three positions: OFF,
Door Activated, and ON.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
on the lens.
Light Control Switch
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
112
ON
DOOR
ACTIVATED
POSITION
OFF
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lights go out about six seconds
after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed.
With the light control switch in the
Door Activated position, all the
individual map lights come on when
you unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page ).
Withanydoororthetailgateleft
open, the lights stay on about three
minutes, then go out.
When the switch is in the ON
position:
All the individual map lights come on
andstayonaslongastheswitch
remains in the ON position.
84
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the front individual map
lights by pushing the button next to
each light. Push the button again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page ).
Turn on the grab rail light by
pushing the lens on each light. Push
the lens again to turn the light off.
You can also operate these lights
with the light control switch (see
page ).
The light in the tailgate has an on-off
switch. When the switch is in the ON
position, the light comes on when
thetailgateisopened.
112
112
Individual Map Lights Tailgate Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
114
FRONT GRAB RAIL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door, and
stays on several seconds after you
close the door.
The courtesy lights in the front
doors come on whenever you open
either front door.
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
Ignition Switch Light Courtesy Lights
115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
116
Main Menu
.....................Heating and Cooling . 118
.........What Each Control Does . 118
............How to Use the System . 122
..........To Turn Everything Off . 127
...............Climate Control System . 128
(EX model)
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 130
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 131
Sunlight Sensor/
............Temperature Sensor . 134
...........................Rear A/C Unit . 135
.......................Audio System (LX) . 137
AM/FM/CD
........................Audio System . 137
.................Operating the Radio . 137
.................Adjusting the Sound . 141
..............................Digital Clock . 142
............Audio System Lighting . 143
.........Operating the CD Player . 143
.....Operating the CD Changer . 145
....CD Player Error Indications . 147
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 148
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 149
............Tape Search Functions . 151
.......................Audio System (EX) . 153
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Audio
....................................System . 153
.................Operating the Radio . 154
.................Adjusting the Sound . 158
..............................Digital Clock . 159
............Audio System Lighting . 159
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 160
............Tape Search Functions . 162
.........Operating the CD Player . 163
.....Operating the CD Changer . 165
....CD Player Error Indications . 166
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 167
Audio System (Optional on U.S.
..............................EX model) . 168
AM/FM/Cassette/CD/DVD
........................Audio System . 168
.................Operating the Radio . 170
.................Adjusting the Sound . 174
..............................Digital Clock . 175
............Audio System Lighting . 175
....................Radio Frequencies . 176
........................Radio Reception . 176
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 178
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 181
.........Operating the CD Player . 182
.....Operating the CD Changer . 184
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 185
....CD Player Error Indications . 186
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 187
...........Remote Audio Controls . 188
.......................Theft Protection . 189
........Rear Entertainment System . 190
............................Security System . 206
...............................Cruise Control . 207
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 210
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
117
Main Menu
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for best
visibility.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
in the button lights when the A/C is
on.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
On LX model
118
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
MODE CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Use the MODE control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. In this case you cannot turn it
off.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode and turns on the A/C.
77
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
Recirculation Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control Dial
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the center
dashboard vents by moving the tab
in the center of each vent up-and-
down and side-to-side.
The direction of the air coming from
the corner vents can be adjusted by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down.
The corner vents can be opened and
closed with the dials underneath
them.
You can also adjust the direction of
the air coming from the rear center
ventsbymovingthetabinthecenter
of each vent up-and-down and side-
to-side.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
Vent Controls
120
CENTER VENTS
CORNER VENT
REAR CENTER VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
121
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
How to Use the System
122
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL DIALAIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm from
beingparkedinthesun,youcancool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Start the engine.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the tempera-
ture control dial is turned all the
way to the left.
Set the fan to maximum speed.
Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
1.
2.
3.
68
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
Ventilation To Cool with A/C
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To warm the interior:
Start the engine.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Heat
124
MODE CONTROL DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather:
Switch the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
To Defog and Defrost
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the corner vents with the dial
underneath each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
126
MODE CONTROL DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unit
that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the heating, cooling, and fan
speed. See page for operation of
the rear A/C unit.
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
You should shut the system
completely off only for the first few
minutes of driving in cold weather,
until the engine coolant warms up
enough to operate the heater. Keep
the fan on at all other times so stale
air does not build up in the interior.
136
Rear A/C Unit To Turn Everything Off
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The automatic climate control
system in your Honda picks the
proper combination of air condi-
tioning, heating, and ventilation to
maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unit
that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the heating, cooling, and air
flow (see page ).
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials underneath them.
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each corner
of the dashboard is adjustable.
Move the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
135
On EX model
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
128
CENTER VENTS
CORNER VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
129
REAR CENTER VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button and set the
desired temperature by turning the
temperature control dial. You will
see FULL AUTO in the system’s
display. The light above the
button also show you which
mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is
selected.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
Fully-automatic Operation
130
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain auto-
matically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL to go out.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control
buttons. When you press either
button, the fan is taken out of
automatic mode and starts to run at
its lowest speed. Pressing the
button repeatedly makes the fan run
faster. The fan speed is shown by
vertical bars in the display.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button Fan Control Buttons
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes. Each time you
press the MODE button, the display
shows the mode selected. Press the
button four times to see all the
modes.
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
Mode Buttons
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase air flow to the windshield by
closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).77
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Window Defogger Button
133
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
134
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has two controls for the
rear A/C unit. The rear A/C control
button is located on the climate
control panel, and the rear A/C
passenger control dial is on the back
of the center console.
You can adjust the heating and
cooling of the rear A/C unit with
these controls.
On EX model
Rear A/C Unit
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
REAR A/C
CONTROL BUTTON
REAR CENTER VENT
REAR A/C PASSENGER
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the system is in FULL AUTO,
the rear A/C passenger control dial
cannot be used. The system will
cycle on and off automatically to
bring the interior to the set
temperature.
To enable the rear A/C passenger
control dial, press the RR A/C
Manual button on the control panel.
The light in the button will come on.
When the rear A/C passenger
control dial is enabled, the passenger
in the second row can use the rear
A/C passenger control dial to adjust
the temperature up to 21°F (10°C)
higher or lower than the front. This
is limited by the minimum and
maximum system temperatures.
With the passenger control dial on
the back of the center console, you
can adjust the rear temperature
independently of the front.
On EX model On EX model
On LX modelRear A/C Control Button Rear A/C Passenger Control Dial
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
136
AUTO BUTTON
REAR A/C CONTROL BUTTON
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
CONTINUED
On LX model
Audio System
AM/FM/CD Audio System
Operating the Radio
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the Preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
theSEEKbaroneitherthe or
side, then release it.
Depending on which side you press,
the system scans upward or down-
ward from the current frequency. It
stops when it finds a station with a
strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
138
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
To store a frequency:
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preset
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
AM/FM BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
SCAN INDICATOR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE/MODE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
140
AUTO SELECT INDICATOR SCAN BUTTON
TUNE
KNOB
A.SEL BUTTONSEEK BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob. Each mode is shown in
the display as it changes.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
Adjustment Level
TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The audio system display usually
shows the time when the ignition
switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II). It shows the operation mode of
the radio, CD player, or optional
cassette player or CD changer when
you operate them, then goes back to
the time display after five seconds.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the clock button, then
pressing the RESET button (preset
6) sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, the clock is set
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the time
setting will be lost. To set the time
again, follow the setting procedure.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
To set the clock, press and hold the
CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(preset 4) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 5) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Digital Clock
142
RESETMH
CLOCK BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
For information, see page .
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
176
73
CONTINUED
Operating the CD Player
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
CD/TAPE BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
CD SLOT
RPT BUTTON
REPEAT INDICATOR
EJECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM INDICATOR
A.SEL/RDM BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＋
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourcar.Itholdsuptosixdiscs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
CONTINUED
REPEAT Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
RANDOM PLAY
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
Ifyouejectthediscinthein-dash
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD
changer and begin play where it left
off. If there are no CDs in the
changer, the display will flash. You
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.
185
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication SolutionCause
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication SolutionCause
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
CONTINUED
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
AM/FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD/TAPE
BUTTON
REPEAT
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
REPEAT
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PLAY/PROG
BUTTON
REW BUTTON FF BUTTON
NR BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PLAY/
PROG button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the NR button.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button on the cassette player.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the PLAY/PROG button.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD/TAPE button. To
change back to the cassette player,
press the CD/TAPE button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
The Skip function allows
youtofindthebeginningofasong
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the FF, REW or PLAY/PROG
button to take the system out of re-
wind or fast forward. When the sys-
tem reaches the end of the tape, it
reverses direction and begins to play.
CONTINUED
Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
181
REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).189
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
On EX model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Audio
System
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Operating the Radio
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
154
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SCAN
INDICATOR
STEREO
INDICATOR
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−＋
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it. The
preset frequencies will be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either the or SEEK button,
then release it. Depending on which
button you press, the system scans
upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
TUNE
Preset
SEEK
SCAN
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
AUTO SELECT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
156
A.SEL
INDICATOR
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
A.SEL
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the MODE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
MODE knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the MODE
knob. Adjust the selected mode by
turning the MODE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting.
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
158
ADJUSTMENT LEVEL
DIGITAL CLOCK
SET
BUTTON
H BUTTON M BUTTON
MODE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
MODE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
MODE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
For information, see page .
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Therightdisplayshowsthetime
when the ignition is in ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II).
To set the clock, press and hold the
SET (TUNE) button until the
numbers flash. Change the hours by
pressing the H ( ) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M ( ) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. When
you are finished, press the SET
button again.
C
73
176
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Digital Clock
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
160
DOLBY
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
CASSETTE
SLOT
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio, CD player, or
CD changer, press the AM/FM or
CD/CHG button. To change back to
the cassette player, press the TAPE
button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
161
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CASSETTE SLOT
RPT
BUTTON
FF BUTTON
TAPE
EJECT
BUTTON
CD/CHG BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
TAPE
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
REW BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−＋
−
−
−
＋
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the FF, REW or PLAY/PROG
button to take the system out of re-
wind or fast forward. When the sys-
tem reaches the end of the tape, it
reverses direction and begins to play.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either SKIP button
(or).
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either SKIP button, also turns off
REPEAT.
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
181
Tape Search Functions
Caring for the Cassette Player
FF/REW
REPEAT
SKIP
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CONTINUED
Operating the CD Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
163
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTONS
CD BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOTPWR/VOL
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋
−
＋
−
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP buttons
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the SEEK/SKIP button.
Press the button to move
forward. You will see CUE in the
display. Press the button to
move backward. You will see REW
displayed. Release the button when
the system reaches the point you
want.
Each time you press and release the
SEEK/SKIP button, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the button to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
164
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (Radio or Cassette Player).
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.185
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error, or a
DVD has been loaded in
the CD player
High Temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
166
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).189
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Optional on U.S. EX model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD/DVD
Audio system
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This system also has a rear
entertainment system that allows the
rear passengers to listen through
wireless headhones to different
programming than the front seat
occupants. A built-in DVD player
allows the rear passengers to watch
DVDs or video CDs. To operate this
part of the system, refer to Rear
Entertainment System on page .
The front control panel has two
displays. The left display shows the
information for the front part of the
system.
When the rear system is on, the
right display shows the information
for the rear part of the system.
190
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
169
FRONT SYSTEM DISPLAY REAR SYSTEM DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Operating the Radio
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
170
SCAN
INDICATOR
STEREO
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−＋
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it. The
preset frequencies will be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either the or SEEK button,
then release it. Depending on which
button you press, the system scans
upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
TUNE
Preset
SEEK
SCAN
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
AUTO SELECT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
172
A.SEL
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
173
AM/FM
BUTTON
A.SEL
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the selected mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
174
DIGITAL CLOCK
SET
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
ADJUSTMENT LEVEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
The right display usually shows the
time when the ignition is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). It
shows the operation mode of the
radio, cassette player, CD player, or
rear entertainment system when you
operate them, then goes back to the
time display after five seconds.
To set the clock, press and hold the
SET (TUNE) button until the
numbers flash. Change the hours by
pressing the H ( ) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M ( ) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. When
you are finished, press the SET
button again.
C
73
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System LightingDigital Clock
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
178
DOLBY
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
CASSETTE
SLOT
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PROG BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio, CD player, or
CD changer, press the AM/FM or
CD/CHG button. To change back to
the cassette player, press the TAPE
button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
179
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
CASSETTE SLOT
TAPE
EJECT
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
REW
BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
FF BUTTON
CD/CHG BUTTON
SEEK BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−＋
−
−
−
＋
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the FF, REW or PLAY/PROG
button to take the system out of re-
wind or fast forward. When the sys-
tem reaches the end of the tape, it
reverses direction and begins to play.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either SKIP button
(or).
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either SKIP button, also turns off
REPEAT.
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
REPEAT
SKIP
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
Caring for the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
Audio System
182
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD SLOT CD EJECT
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋
−
＋
−
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP buttons
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the SEEK/SKIP button.
Press the button to move
forward. You will see CUE in the
display. Press the button to
move backward. You will see REW
displayed. Release the button when
the system reaches the point you
want.
Each time you press and release the
SEEK/SKIP button, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the button to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (Radio or Cassette Player).
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication SolutionCause
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error, or a
DVD has been loaded in
the CD player
High Temperature
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The middle button adjusts the
volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press
the top or bottom of the button and
hold it until the desired volume is
reached, then release it.
The CH button has three functions,
depending on whether you are
listening to the radio, or playing a
cassette or CD.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press this button, the
system advances to the next preset
station on the band you are listening
to. You will see the number of the
selected Preset button in the display.
To change bands, or change from
FM1 to FM2, press the AM/FM
button.
If you are playing a cassette, use the
CH button to advance to the next
selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’ blinking
in the display when you press the CH
button. The system fast forwards
until it senses a silent period, then
goes back to PLAY.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the CH
button. You will see the disc and
track number in the display.
Remote Audio Controls
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
188
CH BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
VOLUME
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘Code’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the Preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code. If
it is entered correctly, the radio will
start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, the user
must enter a specific five-digit code
in the Preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
On EX model
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda is equipped with a Rear
Entertainment System that includes
a DVD player for the enjoyment of
the rear passengers. With this
system, the rear passengers can
enjoy a different entertainment
source (radio, cassette player, CD
player or DVD player) than the front
seat occupants.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the Rear Entertainment
System.
Turn on the rear system by pressing
the REAR PWR button. The rear
entertainment system can then be
operated from the front control panel,
the rear control panel on the ceiling,
or with the remote control. The right
display then shows the information
for the rear system.
Optional on EX model
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
190
REAR PWR
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the rear system is turned on, it
selects the entertainment source it
waslastsetto.Ifthatsourcehas
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
youwillsee‘‘____’’inthedisplay.
You must select another source.
When you turn on the rear system,
the rear speakers are automatically
turned off. You will see the Rear
SpeakersOfficonintherightdisplay.
The sound for the rear system is
sent to the wireless headphones. If
youwanttoturntherearspeakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until they come on.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to. For
example, if you are listening to the
radio, and your rear passengers are
listening to a CD through the
headphones, the rear speakers will
play the radio when you turn them
on. To have the vehicle speakers
play the CD, change the front source
from AM/FM to CD.
Pressing the RR CTRL selector knob
turns off the rear controls. Your
passengers are not able to operate
the rear system with the control
panel in the ceiling or with the
remote control. You will see the Rear
ControlsOfficonintherightdisplay.
Press the selector knob again to turn
the rear controls back on.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
191
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR CTRL
SELECTOR KNOB
REAR CONTROLS
OFF ICON
REAR SPEAKERS
OFF ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs. It features
Dolby noise reduction. The video
screen is designed for use by the
rear seat passengers only.
The driver and front seat passenger
should not try to view the screen
while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushingonthebutton.Thescreen
will swing down part-way. Pivot the
screen the rest of the way. If you
pivot the screen too far forward, past
the detent, the display will turn off.
Pivot the screen back to the detent
to turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
The DVD player is located under the
front control panel. Insert the disc
into the DVD slot. Push the disc in
halfway, the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
Follow the instructions on the
following pages to operate the DVD
player from the front control panel,
the rear control panel, or with the
remote control.
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Rear Video Operation
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
192
REAR CONTROL
PANEL
BUTTON
OVERHEAD
SCREEN
EJECT
BUTTON
DVD SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the knob
counterclockwise. The system will
automatically change back to the
front system several seconds after
you stop pressing the buttons.
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, you
must first turn the RR CTRL knob
clockwise to enable the panel. The
amber RR LED will come on to show
that the control panel is now enabled.
CONTINUED
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
193
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR CTRL SELECTOR
KNOB
RR LED
RPT
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
PAUSE
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
RDM
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
−
Some DVDs start playing
automatically after the disc is loaded
completely. If a disc does not start
playing, press the PLAY button. If
the system is in PAUSE mode, press
the PLAY button to cancel the
PAUSE mode.
Press the PAUSE button to pause
the disc. Press the button again or
press the PLAY button to return to
PLAY. PAUSE works only with
DVDs.
Press the RPT button to
continuously replay the current track.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press the button again to turn it off.
RPT works only with CDs.
To play the tracks within a CD in
random order, press the RDM
button. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the button again to
cancel RDM. RDM works only with
CDs.
You can move rapidly within a track
or a chapter by pressing the SEEK/
SKIP buttons. Press and hold the
button to move forward, You will see
‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and hold
the sidetomovebackward,You
will see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
Each time you press and release the
button, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track or
chapter. If you press the button
while the beginning of a track or
chapter is playing, the system skips
to the beginning of the previous
track or chapter.
PLAY Button
PAUSE Button
RPT Button
RDM Button
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
194
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
You can control some DVD functions
from the rear control panel in the
ceiling Make sure the rear control
operation has not been disabled with
theRRCTRLknobonthefront
panel.
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
showninthedisplay.
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play. To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
, , , and buttons to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the buttontoskipbacktothe
beginning of the current chapter.
If you press the button while the
beginning of a chapter is playing, the
system skips to the beginning of the
previous chapter.
Operating the DVD Player from
the Rear Control Panel
Source Selection Buttons
PLAY/PAUSE/PROG Button
MENU/ENT Buttons
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
195
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
REAR CONTROLS
OFF BUTTON
MENU
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
CH/DISK
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
CH/DISK
BUTTON
ENT BUTTONPLAY/PAUSE/PROG
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can control all of the DVD
functions with the remote control.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the RR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
When using the remote control,
point it at the rear control panel in
the ceiling.
Press this button to start playing a
DVD.
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
showninthedisplay.
Operating the DVD Player with
the Remote Control
Source Selection Buttons
PLAY/PROG Button
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
196
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
REW/FWD BUTTONS
STOP BUTTON
PAUSE BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SUBTITLE BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
ANGLE BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS
DISP BUTTON
RETURN (T/C) BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play.
Some DVDs have menus that allow
you to select a dubbed language,
subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.
Themenucontentswillvaryfrom
DVD to DVD.
Press the MENU button to display
the DVD’s main menu. Use the ,
, , and buttons to select
the desired menu option. Then press
ENT to enter your selection.
If the menu has more than one page,
use the and buttons
to change pages.
You can also use the numbered
buttons to enter the number of a
menu option. You do not have to
press ENT, the option will be
selected when you complete the
number. Make sure you enter two
digits. If the option number is less
than 10, enter a ‘‘0’’ first.
Some DVDs have a title menu. The
contents of the menu vary from
DVD to DVD.
Press the TITLE button to display
the title menu window. Move your
selection by pressing the , ,
and buttons. Enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. If the menu has more than
onepage,usethe and
buttons to change pages.
Press the TITLE button again to
close the window.
Many DVDs are recorded with
subtitles, sometimes in multiple
languages. To select subtitles, press
the SUBTITLE button. Continue to
press and release the SUBTITLE
button to scan through the available
languages.
Press this button to stop playing a
DVD.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the buttontoskipbacktothe
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the button to move
forward rapidly within a chapter. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
button to move backward
rapidly within a chapter. You will see
REV in the display. Release the
button when the system reaches the
point you want.
PAUSE Button MENU Button TITLE Button
SUBTITLE Button
STOP Button
SKIP Buttons
FWD/REW Buttons
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many DVDs are recorded, or
dubbed, in more than one language.
To select a different language than
the one being heard, press the
AUDIO button. Continue to press
and release the AUDIO button to
hear all the available languages.
To change the color, contrast, aspect
ratio, and brightness of the video
screen, press the DISP button. The
current setting of one will be
displayed on the screen each time
you press the button. Use the
and buttons to change the
setting as desired. The display will
disappear from the screen several
seconds after you stop adjusting the
setting.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. By pressing the Angle
button, you can select a different
viewpoint.
In the MENU selection mode,
pressing the RETURN button for
less than two seconds changes the
MENU display to the previous page.
Pressing the RETURN button for
more than two seconds while a DVD
is playing brings the system into the
TITLE enter mode. When you enter
your selection, the DVD player will
start playing from the selected title.
AUDIO Button
DISP Button
ANGLE Button
RETURN (T/C) Button
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Compact Discs’’ on page
.
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs bearing the
above marks on their packages or
jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the area designation of ‘‘1’’
or ‘‘ALL’’.
DVD-ROMs cannot be played in this
system.
185
Protecting DVDsPlayable DVDs
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
199
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication Solution
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the DVD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Cause
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the
DVD Player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the DVD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Run the engine to recharge the battery.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Low Vehicle Battery
Voltage
DVDPlayerErrorIndications
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
An audio CD can be played in either
the main CD player in the front panel,
in the DVD/CD player below the
front panel, or in the optional CD
changer. This allows the front and
rear passengers to listen to different
CDs.
Select the rear system by turning the
RR CTRL knob clockwise. If the CD
is loaded in the main CD player, or
CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the
CD is loaded in the lower player,
select DVD/AUX.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or CD changer, refer to pages
and for operating
instructions. If the CD is loaded in
the DVD/AUX player, refer to page
.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of current track. Press it
again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
If the CD changer is selected, use
the and buttons to change
discs.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdeithertheFWDorREW
buttons. When you press FWD, you
will see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. When
you press REW, you will see ‘‘REW’’
in the display. Release the button
when the system reaches the desired
point.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
182 184
193
Playing a CD With the Rear
Entertainment System
Playing a CD With the Front Panel
Playing a CD With the Rear Control
Panel
Playing a CD With the Remote
Control
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Select the radio with the AM/FM
buttononthefrontpanel,therear
control panel, or the remote control.
From the front panel, after selecting
the rear system with the RR CTRL
knob, use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN functions or the Preset
buttons to select a station.
From the rear control panel in the
ceiling, use the and
buttons to select the stations
that are set into the Preset buttons.
Pressing the or button will
cause the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.
To change Preset stations with the
remote control, press the or
button. To search for strong
stations, press the or
button.
After loading the cassette, select the
cassette player with the TAPE
buttononthefrontpanel,therear
control panel, or the remote control.
On the rear control panel, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Use the and
buttons to skip. Press the
button to skip forward to the
beginning of the next song or
passage. You will see FF flashing in
the display. Press the button to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current song or passage. You will
seeREVflashinginthedisplay.
On the remote control, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Press the FWD or
REW button to fast forward or
rewind the tape. Press either of
those buttons or the PROG/PLAY
button to return to playing the tape.
To skip to the beginning of the next
song or passage, press the
button. You will see FF
flashinginthedisplay.Toskiptothe
beginning of the current song or
passage, press the button. You
will see REV flashing in the display.
To operate the cassette player from
the front panel, refer to page .
Make sure you have selected the
rear system with the RR CTRL knob
first.
178
Playing the Radio With the Rear
Entertainment System
Playing a Cassette With the Rear
Entertainment System
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
To replace the batteries in the
remote control, press down on the
symbol on the back, then slide the
cover off. Remove the old batteries.
Make sure the polarity of new
batteries is correct when you install
them. Install the cover by sliding it
on until it locks. The remote control
uses two AA batteries.
When you are not using the remote
control, store it in its holder in the
front seat pocket as shown.
Replacing Remote Control
Batteries
Storing the Remote Control
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
203
BATTERIES
COVER
HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The batteries are under the domed
covers on the back of each earpiece.
To remove a cover, press down on it
with your thumb, slide it backward
(away from the headband), then lift
it up. Remove the battery and note
its polarity. Install the new battery in
theearpiecewiththepolaritythe
same. Set the cover in place, then
slide it up until it locks. Each
headphone uses two AAA batteries.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. To turn on the headphones,
presstheredbuttonontheearpiece.
Adjust the volume level with the dial
at the bottom of the same earpiece.
To adjust the comfort of the
headphones, slide the earpieces up
or down the headband.
For greater battery life, turn off the
headphones when they are not in use
by pressing the red button again.
They will turn off automatically if
they do not receive an audio signal
from the system for several minutes.
When not in use, store the
headphones in the pocket on the
back of either front seat.
Some state and local goverment
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
Wireless Headphones
Replacing Batteries
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
204
ON/OFF BUTTON
VOLUME
DIAL
BATTERY
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
205
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
VOLUME DIALS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), or
the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Tailgate Open
Monitor on the instrument panel
(see page ) to see if the doors and
tailgate are fully closed. Since it is
notpartofthemonitordisplay,
manually check the hood.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s front door with the key or
the remote transmitter.
The security system sets auto-
matically, fifteen seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and tailgate.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors from the outside with
the key, or remote transmitter. The
security system light next to the low
oil pressure indicator starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
64
On EX model
Security System
Comfort and Convenience Features
206
SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the vehicle under
those conditions.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
light on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Cruise Control
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
207
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH
RESUME/ACCEL
CANCEL
SET/DECEL
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
Press and hold the RESUME/
ACCEL button. The vehicle will
accelerate. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/DECEL
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
ACCEL button repeatedly. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will
speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. The vehicle will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instru-
ment panel will go out. When the
vehicle slows to the desired speed,
press the SET/DECEL button.
The vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
will cause the cruise control to
cancel.
Tap the brake pedal.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel will go out and the vehicle will
begin to slow down. You can use the
accelerator pedal in the normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h)andthen
press and release the RESUME/
ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL light comes on. The
vehicle will accelerate to the same
cruising speed as before.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Using the
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
209
CANCEL
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
While training or using HomeLink,
make sure you have a clear view of
the garage door or gate, and that no
one will be injured by its movement.
The HomeLink transceiver stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
HomeLink if your car’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. Garage door
openers manufactured before that
date do not have a safety feature that
causes them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperate
remotely-controlled devices around
your home, such as garage doors,
lighting, or home security systems. It
can replace up to three remote
transmitters.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
On EX model
Important Safety Precautions
General Information
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
Before you can use HomeLink to
operate devices around your home, it
must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train HomeLink to open
and close the garage door:
If you just took
delivery of your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red light in HomeLink.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press the button on the remote
control and the button on
HomeLink at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
2.
3.
4.
1.
CONTINUED
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian Owners:
The remote control you are training
from may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
HomeLink to learn the code. Release
and press the button on the remote
control every two seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so they send and
receive the correct codes.
The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
transceiver button by pushing it. It
should operate the garage door.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink
transceiver button you just trained.
If the red light blinks for two
seconds,thenstayson,youhavea
rolling code garage door opener.
You may be able to verify this with
the manufacturer’s documentation.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System.’’
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotely-
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
5.
6.
8.
7.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
212
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Itmaybehelpfultohavesomeone
assist you with this procedure.
Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 4 seconds.
(The same button you trained with
the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure.)
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
light on the garage door opener
unit. (Some systems may require
youtopressthebuttonuptothree
times.)
Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
213
TTRRAAIINNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Totrainanalreadyprogrammed
transmitter button to operate a new
device:
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, place the
remotecontrolforthedevice2to
5inchesfromHomeLink.
Release both buttons. HomeLink
should now be trained to operate
the device.
Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.Retraining a Button
Erasing Codes
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 216
.........................................Gasoline . 216
.........Service Station Procedures . 217
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 217
....................Opening the Hood . 218
...............................Oil Check . 220
.........Engine Coolant Check . 221
...............................Fuel Economy . 222
.....................Vehicle Condition . 222
...........................Driving Habits . 222
...Accessories and Modifications . 223
.............................Carrying Cargo . 225
.................................Load Limit . 226
Before Driving
Before Driving
215
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are replaced.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
We also recommend that you do not
tow a trailer during the first 500
miles (800 km).
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page ).256
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Before Driving
Filling the Fuel Tank
Gasoline, Service Station Procedures
217
Pull
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there
maybeaproblemwiththissystem.
Consult your dealer.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
349
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
218
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
Standing in front of the vehicle,
put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood to the left of
center. Slide your hand to the left
until you feel the hood latch
handle. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.
Pull the support rod out of its clip,
and insert the end into the hole at
the center of the hood, or the hole
on the left side of the hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
3.
2.
298
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
219
LATCH
SUPPORT RODCLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its tube.Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a
few minutes after turning the engine
off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
3.2.
1.
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
220
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
4.
283
287
281
Adding
Engine Coolant
Adding Oil
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
Before Driving
Service Station Procedures
221
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX
MIN
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The condition of your vehicle and
your driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Always maintain your vehicle accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
This will keep it in top operating
condition.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
281
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Before Driving
Fuel Economy
222
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicle’s electrical system
capacity, they can interfere with the
operation of your vehicle, or even
cause the airbags to deploy.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Before installing any accessory:
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has genuine Honda
accessories that allow you to
personalize your vehicle. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your vehicle, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page for
additional information.)
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
If possible, have your Honda dealer
inspect the final installation.
356
224
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
223
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to impact speed
bumps or other raised objects,
which could cause the airbags to
deploy.
Raising the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Honda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Modifications Additional Safety Precaution
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
Do not attach or place objects on
the airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the front doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The cargo area is intended for larger,
heavier items. The second and third
row seats can be folded flat to allow
you to carry more cargo or longer
items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
operation, and make it unsafe.
Before carrying any type of cargo, be
sure to read the following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
225
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKET
CARGO AREA
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
Add up the weight of all occupants.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
When you load luggage, the total
weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The load
for the front and rear axles also must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and
GAWRareprintedonthetire
information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb (see page ).
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,323 lbs (600 kg).
Subtract the total from 1,323 lbs
(600 kg).
360
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
226
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items on it does
not exceed 165 lb (75 kg).
Thehooksoneachsideofthe
tailgate and on the underside of the
cargo area storage compartment lid
are for plastic grocery bags. To use
the hooks on the storage
compartment lid, open the lid, and
attach the cord to one of the shafts
of the third seat center head
restraint.
56
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be installed in a forward position and
extended over the larger cargo area.
Do not install the cargo cover in the
forward position if the third row
seats are not folded down.
Theseparationnetcanbeusedto
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
The hook on the rear of the console
compartment is for plastic grocery
bags.
On LX model
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
Optional Separation Net
Optional Cargo Cover
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 System, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Driving Guidelines . 230
........................Preparing to Drive . 231
.......................Starting the Engine . 232
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 232
..............Automatic Transmission . 233
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 233
................Shift Lever Positions . 234
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 236
....................Shift Lock Release . 236
Variable Torque Management
..............................4WD System . 238
..............................VTM-4 Lock . 238
...........................................Parking . 240
.....................The Braking System . 241
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 241
...............Brake System Design . 242
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 242
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 243
........................ABS Indicator . 243
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 245
...........................Towing a Trailer . 247
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
................................Motorhome . 259
..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 261
Driving
Driving
229
Main Menu
Theseadvantagescomeatsomecost.
Because your vehicle is taller and
rides higher off the ground, it has a
high center of gravity. This means
that your vehicle can tip or roll over
if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent the risk of rollover or
loss of control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Your Pilot has higher ground
clearance than a passenger vehicle
designed for use only on pavement.
Higher ground clearance has many
advantages for off-highway driving.
It allows you to travel over bumps,
obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can
anticipate problems earlier.
See page for additional guidelines
for driving off-highway.
261
Driving
Driving Guidelines
230
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that the hood and tailgate
arefullyclosed. Makesurethedoorsandtailgate
are securely closed and locked.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
10.
15
78 61
102
232
89
Preparing to Drive
Driving
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
Starting the Engine
Driving
232
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
Your Honda’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid acceler-
ation and have the transmission
checkedbyanauthorizedHonda
dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator
if there is a problem in the automatic
transmission control system.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Automatic Transmission
Driving
233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The shift lever has seven positions.
It must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on
the brake pedal, and keep your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwiththe
brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
236
3
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
Shift Lever Positions Park (P)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
234
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the vehicle
for any reason. Press on the brake pe-
dal when you are moving the shift
lever from Neutral to another gear.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Pull the shift lever
towards you before shifting into
Reverse from Neutral.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D when
towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. D can also keep
the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one
or two gears, depending on your
speed.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Neutral (N)
Reverse (R)
Drive (D)
Drive (D )
3
235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
When driving down hill with a trailer,
use the Second position.
To shift from Second
to First, pull the shift lever
towards you, then shift to the
lower gear. With the lever in this
position, the transmission locks in
First gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, D and
D, you can operate this
transmission much like a manual
transmission without a clutch
pedal.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
Set the Parking brake.
Make sure the key is in the
ignition switch LOCK (0) position.
To shift to Second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Second gives you more power when
climbing, and increased engine
braking when going down steep hills.
Usesecondgearwhenstartingout
on a slippery surface or in deep snow.
It will help reduce wheelspin.
1.
2.
3
Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
First (1)
Second (2)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
236
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your Honda
dealer.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover.
Use a small flat-tipped screw
driver or small metal plate (neither
are included in the tool kit) to
remove the cover. Carefully pry on
the edge of the cover.
Insert a screwdriver in the Shift
Lock Release slot.
Push down on the screwdriver
while you pull the shift lever
towards you and move it out of
Park to Neutral.
Remove the screwdriver from the
shift lock release slot, then install
the cover.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Driving
Automatic Transmission
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Variable Torque Management
4WD System (VTM-4) automatically
transfers varying amounts of engine
torque to the rear wheels under low
traction conditions.
If more traction is needed when your
Pilot is stuck or is likely to become
stuck, you can use the VTM-4 Lock
button to increase torque to the rear
wheels. As soon as this feature is no
longer needed, press the VTM-4
Lock button again to disengage the
VTM-4 Lock.
VTM-4 Lock
Variable Torque Management 4WD System
Driving
238
Do not use the VTM-4 Lock button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noises and
vibration can also result.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To engage the VTM-4 Lock: To disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
one of the following:
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It will
automatically engage again as the
speed slows below 18 mph (30
km/h). The light in the VTM-4 Lock
button will remain on the whole time.
The vehicle must be stopped with
the engine running.
Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2) or reverse (R) gear.
Press the VTM-4 Lock button.
The light in the button will come
on.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to get the vehicle to
move, apply the brakes to stop the
wheels, then reverse direction.
Press the VTM-4 Lock button.
Move the shift lever to D, or D .
Turn the ignition to OFF (0).
When you restart your Pilot, the
VTM-4 Lock feature will be off.
1.
2.
3.
3
Variable Torque Management 4WD System
Driving
239
Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
of your PILOT. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif ferential damage.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. The indicator
on the instrument panel shows that
the parking brake is not fully
released; it does not indicate that the
parking brake is firmly set. Make
sure the parking brake is set firmly
or your vehicle may roll if it is
parked on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission making it
easier to move the shift lever out of
Park when you want to drive away.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels toward the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
Your Honda is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. The
indicators make a very audible
‘‘screeching.’’
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal; it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Your vehicle has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle
continues straight ahead even
though you turn the steering wheel.
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up
and helps you retain steering control
by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You should never pump the
brake pedal;
Anti-lock BrakesBrake System Design
The Braking System
Driving
242
Front
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
it only helps with steering
control during braking. You should
always maintain a safe following
distance from other vehicles.
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.
63
CONTINUED
ABS IndicatorImportant Safety Reminders
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle,
The Braking System
Driving
243
ABS INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
351
The Braking System
Driving
244
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your vehicle longer
to react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-
quire a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your vehicle well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these condi-
tions.
Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defrosters and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
page ).125
CONTINUED
Driving Technique Visibility
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Traction
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
246
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To safely tow a trailer, you should
observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage ifyou
plan to tow off paved surfaces.
The
maximum weight you can tow
depends on several factors. See
page for limits for your towing
situation. Towing a load that is too
heavy can seriously affect your
vehicle’s handling and
performance.
Your PILOT has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as for carrying
passengers and their cargo.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be 5 to 10
percent of total trailer weight for
boat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent of
total trailer weight for all other
trailers. See page for limits for
your towing situation.
261
249
249
Off-Highway
Guidelines
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
247
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Too much tongue load reduces front-
tire traction and steering control.
Too little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is
9700 lbs (4410 kg) with the proper
hitch and fluid coolers (See page
for information about fluid
coolers.)The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo
and the tongue load is 5,950 lbs
(2,700 kg).
The maximum allowable weights on
the vehicle axles are 2865 lbs (1300
kg) on the front axle, and 3,155 lbs
(1,430 kg) on the rear axle.
253
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
248
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Max. Trailer Weight
Towing is Not Recommended
Max. Tongue Load
Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load
Towing is Not Recommended
Towing a Trailer
Driving
249
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15lbs(7
kg) of luggage in the cargo area.
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
BOAT TRAILERS
OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS
4500 lbs (2045 kg)
4500 lbs (2045 kg)
4500 lbs (2045 kg)
4300 lbs (1945 kg)
4100 lbs (1855 kg)
2000 lbs (905 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
3500 lbs (1590 kg)
3500 lbs (1590 kg)
3300 lbs (1490 kg)
3100 lbs (1400 kg)
2700 lbs (1220 kg)
1200 lbs (540 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale
to check the weights of your rig, we
recommended that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described below.
To estimate your total trailer weight,
add the weight of the trailer (as
quoted by the trailer manufacturer)
together with everything in or on the
trailer. Then refer to the tables on
page to confirm that you do not
exceed the limit for your conditions.
To estimate tongue load:
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Measure from the ground to the
bottom of the trailer hitch. Write
this number down.
Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
Subtract the result from Step 4
from the result in Step 2 and refer
to the chart (Fig. 1).
Ifthedifferenceis:
1 = 150 lbs (68 kg)
1¾ = 250 lbs (114 kg)
2½ = 350 lbs (160 kg)
3 = 450 lbs (204 kg)
3¼ = over 450 lbs (205 kg)
Ifthedifferenceismorethan
3¼ , you have too much tongue
load at the rear. Move or
remove cargo from the trailer
and the vehicle, and measure
again.
If the estimated total trailer weight
and tongue load do not exceed the
limits for your towing situation (see
page ), carefully drive your
trailer to a public scale. Be sure your
vehicle and trailer are fully loaded,
with all occupants and cargo you
plan to take on the road.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
249
249
Estimating Loads
Total Trailer Weight
Tongue Load Fig. 1
Towing a Trailer
Driving
250
’’
’’
’’
’’
’’
’’
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatyour
vehicle and trailer loads are within
limits is to have them checked at a
public scale. The vehicle and trailer
should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle.
Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2865 lbs (1300 kg)
Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 5952 lbs (2700 kg)
If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, calculate the rear gross
axle weight. Subtract the weight in
Step 1 from the weight in Step 2.
Limit: 3153 lbs (1430 kg)
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Checking Loads
Towing a Trailer
Driving
251
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the gross combined weight. Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page .
Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in Step 5 from
the weight in step 6.
Limit: See page .
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers
Gross combined weight should be
decreased 2% for every 1000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
4. 5. 6.
7.
Limit: 249
249
Towing a Trailer
Driving
252
9700 lbs (4410 kg)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained.
Since local requirements may vary,
check with appropriate state
authorities to be sure that your
equipment will meet all regulations
in the areas where you plan to tow.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
so they can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but to do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers a trailer package
that includes a hitch, a ball mount, a
wiring harness, a transmission fluid
cooler, and a heavy-duty power
steering fluid cooler.
We strongly recommend that you
have your Honda dealer install a
genuine Honda hitch and the
required fluid coolers. Using non-
Honda equipment may result in
serious damage to your vehicle.
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your Pilot
as an improperly adjusted weight
distributing hitch may reduce
handling stability and braking
performance.
To help prevent overheating, a
heavy-duty transmission fluid cooler
and a heavy-duty power steering
fluid cooler are required for trailer
towing. These coolers are available
only from your Honda dealer.
CONTINUED
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitch
Weight Distributing Hitch
Safety Chains
Sway Control
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Towing a Trailer
Driving
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
Electric brakes must be
electronically actuated. Do not
attempt to tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic system. Any attempt to
attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic system will lower braking
effectiveness and create a potential
hazard.
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total trailer weight of 1000 lbs (455
kg) or more have its own brakes.
See your brake manufacturer for
more information on installing
electric brakes.
Trailer Brakes
Towing a Trailer
Driving
254
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
All states and Canadian provinces
require some type of trailer lights.
Check requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow.
To get to your vehicle’s trailer
lighting connector, open the tailgate,
remove the cargo cover, then
remove the rear panel trim. The
connector is on the left side. We
recommend that you have your
Honda dealer install a Honda wiring
harness and converter. This harness
has been designed and tested for
your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
cangetthematingconnectorand
pins that mate with the connector in
your vehicle from your Honda dealer.
Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
255
GROUND
(BLACK)
BACK-UP LIGHT
(GREEN/BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/WHITE)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/BLACK)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
We also recommend that you carry a
full-size spare wheel and tire for your
trailer. Ask your trailer sales or
rental agency where and how to
store the spare.
See page for proper tire size,
page for how to store a full-sized
wheel and tire, and page for
information on changing a flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition. If
you tow frequently, follow the
Severe Conditions maintenance
schedule.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated (see page ).
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle.
Using the compact spare that came
with the Pilot may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or climbing steep
grades. Therefore, premium
fuel is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs
(1,590 kg).
313
340
335
308
247 249
Trailer Mirrors
Spare Tires
Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Driving
256
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 500 miles (800
kilometers) (see page ).
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations. Obey all local
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
To keep the transmission from
frequently upshifting and
downshifting, drive in D. When
driving with a fix-sided (e.g, camper,
utility) trailer, do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. When you need
to slow down, slowly lift your foot off
the throttle and gradually apply the
brakes. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
216
CONTINUED
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Break-In Period
Towing Speed Making Turns and Braking
Towing a Trailer
Driving
257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the transmission shifts frequently
while going up a hill, shift down one
gear.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D . Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember
it will take longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause your trailer
to sway. When being passed by a
truck or other large vehicle, keep a
constant speed and steer straight
ahead. Do not try to make quick
steering or braking corrections.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in PARK and firmly
setting the parking brake when you
have finished parking.
Donotparkonaninclineunlessitis
unavoidable. If you must park on an
incline, turn the vehicle wheels
toward the curb on a downhill and
awayfromthecurbonanuphill.
After parking, place wheel chocks at
each trailer tire, on the downhill side.
If the vehicle wheels slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shifttofirstgearandturnonVTM-4
Lock (see page ).
Disengage VTM-4 Lock as soon as
the boat is out of the water to
prevent damage to the VTM-4
system.
238
3
bottom
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and
Turbulence
Backing Up
Parking
Retrieving a Boat
Towing a Trailer
Driving
258
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours.
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page ).
Maintaining the correct fluid level
is very important.
Start the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) so the steering
wheel does not lock. Make sure
the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets
are turned off so you do not run
down the battery.
Release the parking brake.
Your Pilot can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, it must be towed
with all four wheels on the ground
(flat towing).
Press on the brake pedal. Shift the
lever through all the positions (P,
R, N, D, D , 2, 1)
ShifttoD,thentoN.Letthe
engine run for three minutes, then
turn off the engine.
Do the following to prepare your
Pilot for ‘‘flat towing.’’ Perform this
procedure every day immediately
before you begin towing, and follow
this procedure exactly; otherwise,
severe automatic transmission
damage will occur.
293
Do not overfill
.
CONTINUED
3
Extended Towing
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Replace the transmission fluid every
two years or 30,000 miles (48,000
km), whichever comes first.
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
260
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a f lat-bed or trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Pilot has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and four-
wheel drive VTM-4 system allow you
to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,
and similar locations. It is not
designed for trailblazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your Pilot will also handle somewhat
differently than it does on pavement.
So be sure to read this owner’s
manual, pay special attention to the
precautions and tips in this section,
and get acquainted with your vehicle
before you leave the pavement.
General Information
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The route presents limits (some
roads are too steep and bumpy for
example). You have limits (in driving
skills and comfort). And your vehicle
also has limits (traction, stability, and
power, for instance).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take proper precautions.
For example, you can have an
accident or rollover during
maneuvers such as turning, driving
on hills, or over large obstacles.
On many unpaved roads, you won’t
find lane markers, traffic signals, or
signs to warn you of possible trouble
ahead. It’s up to you to continually
assess the situation and drive within
limits.
Remember that your Pilot has higher
ground clearance and a higher
center of gravity than passenger
vehicles designed for use only on
pavement. This means your vehicle
can more easily tip or roll over if you
make abrupt turns or drive on slopes.
Be sure to store cargo properly, and
do not exceed your Pilot cargo load
limits (see pages and ).
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To avoid loss of control
or rollover, be sure to follow all
recommendations and precautions
on page and in this section.
Seat belts are just as important off-
road as on paved roads. Wherever
you drive, make sure you and your
passengers always wear seat belts. If
children or infants are along for the
ride, see that they are properly
secured. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt.
230
226 247
Important Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
262
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in the owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages contain practical
tips on basic off-highway operation.
Driving off-highway can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the
pavement, be sure all scheduled
maintenance and service has been
done, and that you have inspected
your vehicle. Pay special attention to
the condition of the tires, and use a
gauge to check the tire pressures.
Off-highway, the general rule is to
keep your speed low. Of course,
you’ll need enough speed to keep
moving forward. But at higher
speeds, you have less time to assess
conditions and make good decisions.
There’s also a greater chance of
sliding if you brake or turn too
quickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. In
any situation, never go faster than
conditions allow.
Generally, the best off-pavement
braking technique is to gently
depress the brake pedal, then
increase pressure as more braking is
needed. Avoid hard braking. Keep in
mind that you will usually need more
time and distance to brake to a stop
on unpaved surfaces.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe. Check
the tires for damage and for proper
pressure.
If you need to brake hard because of
an emergency, apply steady, even
pressure to the brake pedal. Do not
pump the brakes; let the anti-lock
braking system pump them for you.
If you pump the brakes, the anti-lock
cannot work as efficiently, and your
stopping distance may be increased.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway. You may even dig
yourself into a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second gear (2) will
help get you to a smooth start on
snow and ice.
CONTINUED
Controlling Speed
Check Out Your Vehicle
Accelerating and Braking
Driving Tips
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Test your brakes from time to time
to make sure they are operating
properly. This will also give you a
feel for how much traction you have
on a given surface.
Off-highway, the basic turning
technique is to drive at low speed
and gradually adjust the amount of
steering to suit the surface.
You should have no problem making
sharp turns at low speed on level
ground. But never make an abrupt
turn at higher speeds, on or off
pavement. With a higher center of
gravity, your vehicle can more easily
tip or roll over.
Before driving up or down a hill, stop
and assess the situation. If you can’t
clearly see all road conditions (good
traction, no bumps, holes or other
obstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walk
the slope before you drive on it. If
you have any doubt about whether
you can safely drive on the slope,
. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue (because of
the steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),
. Your vehicle
could roll over. Slowly back down the
hill, following the same route you
took up the hill.
Bumps, holes, rocks, and other
obstacles can be hazardous. Debris
in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Even small rocks can cut your tires.
More important, because your
vehicle has a high center of gravity,
driving over a large obstacle, or
allowing a wheel to drop into a deep
hole, can cause your vehicle to tip or
roll over.
Drive slow enough to observe
obstacles ahead and maneuver
around them. If you can’t avoid a
serious obstacle, turn around and
look for a better route.
don’t do it
do not try to turn around
Turning
Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes
Off-Highway Guidelines
Driving
264
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving through water, stop
and make sure that:
The water is never deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe. You could stall, and
not be able to restart the engine.
The water could also damage
important vehicle components.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushingwatercanwashthe
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
If you decide it’s safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed and engage VTM-4 Lock (see
page ), then proceed without
shifting or changing speed. Do not
stop the vehicle or shut off the
engine while trying to cross a stream.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If the brakes got wet,
drive slowly while gently pumping
the brakes until they operate
normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service to the
engine, transmission and differential
mayberequired.Thisserviceisnot
covered by your warranties.
238
Crossing a Stream
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
Lock mode (see page ).
Carefully try to go in the direction
(forward or reverse) that you think
will give you the best chance of
getting unstuck.
Donotspinthetiresathighspeeds.
It will not help you get out and may
cause damage to the transmission or
the VTM-4 system.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
You may be able to safely tow a light
weight trailer (such as a motorcycle
trailer or small tent trailer) off-road if
you follow these guidelines:
Do not exceed a trailer weight of
1,000 pounds (450 kg) (including
cargo) or a tongue weight of 100
pounds (45 kg).(Tongue weight
should be about 10% of the trailer
weight.)
If you are unable to free yourself,
you will need to be pulled out by
another vehicle. Your Pilot is
equipped with front and rear tow
hooks designed for this purpose.
Use a nylon strap to attach the Pilot
to the recovery vehicle, and carefully
take out the slack in the strap. Once
the strap is tight, the recovery
vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
238
If You Get Stuck Towing a Trailer
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
266
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Trytostayonsmooth,leveldirt
roads, and avoid driving in hilly
terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
267
Main Menu
Table of Contents
268
Main Menu
This section explains the importance
of keeping your vehicle well
maintained and why you should
follow basic maintenance safety
precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 270
.Important Safety Precautions . 271
.................Maintenance Schedule . 272
...Required Maintenance Record . 279
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 281
..............................Fluid Locations . 282
......................................Engine Oil . 283
..................................Adding Oil . 283
....................Recommended Oil . 283
..............................Synthetic Oil . 284
....................................Additives . 284
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 285
.............................Cooling System . 287
............Adding Engine Coolant . 287
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 289
....................Windshield Washers . 292
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 293
..........................Differential Fluid . 294
....................................Brake Fluid . 295
............................Brake System . 295
..............................Power Steering . 296
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 297
....................................Hood Latch . 298
....................................Spark Plugs . 299
..............................Replacement . 299
............................Specifications . 301
...........................................Battery . 302
.................................Wiper Blades . 304
..............Air Conditioning System . 306
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 307
.....................................Drive Belts . 307
....................................Timing Belt . 308
...............................................Tires . 308
......................................Inflation . 308
..................................Inspection . 310
..............................Maintenance . 311
.............................Tire Rotation . 311
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 312
......................Wheels and Tires . 313
..........................Winter Driving . 313
.............................Snow Tires . 314
............................Tire Chains . 314
.............................................Lights . 315
.....................Headlight Aiming . 317
........................Replacing Bulbs . 317
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 324
377
Maintenance
Maintenance
269
Main Menu
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is
the best way to protect your
investment. Proper maintenance is
essential to your safety and the
safety of your passengers. It will also
reward you with more economical,
trouble-free driving, and help reduce
air pollution.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
270
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your vehicle is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your
vehicle serviced and what things
need attention. It is essential that
you have your vehicle serviced as
scheduled to retain its high level of
safety, dependability, and emissions
control performance.
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages. Select the schedule
for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of
your driving is done under one or
more of the conditions listed on that
page. Otherwise, follow the schedule
for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
vehicle as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your vehicle. The
load limit is shown on the tire
information label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).216
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
272
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
U.S. Vehicles:
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＃
＃
＃
＃
＃
Follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if the
severe driving conditions
specified in the Severe
Conditions Maintenance
Schedule do not apply.
NOTE: If you only
drive under a
‘‘severe’’ condition, you should
follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
OCCASIONALLY
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
274
Visually inspect the following items:
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
7.5
12
6
15
24
12
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
105
168
84
120
192
96
Adjust only if noisy
273:
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance
275
Canadian owners:
A, B, C, D
A
B
C
D
Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval. Follow this
schedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 311 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system .
Inspect fuel lines and connections .
Replace air cleaner element.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Replace rear differential fluid.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,D
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
Replace transmission fluid.
Inspect idle speed . Inspect valve clearance.
Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Replace engine coolant.
•
•
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Necessary for proper break-in of the VTM-4 rear differential.
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
:
1:
273
1
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃
＃＊
＃
＊
＊
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than
10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods
of stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a
roof top carrier, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
Follow the Severe Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if you drive
your vehicle
MAINLY
under one or
more of the following conditions:
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
276
Visually inspect the following items:
Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and conditions of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls
Vehicle underbody
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
15
24
12
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
105
168
84
120
192
96
Follow this schedule for rear differential
fluid replacement if you use your vehicle
for off-highway driving, trailer towing,
or mainly in stop-and go driving.
Otherwise, use the fluid replacement
schedule in the Maintenance Schedule
for Normal Conditions.
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Use normal schedule except in dusty
conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
7.5
12
6
Adjust only if noisy
Refer to page 308 for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
Refer to page 307 for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
1:
2:
3:
: See page 273.
,1
3
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
□
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＊
＃
＃
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
277
A, B, C, D, E
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
B
C
A
D
E
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
3,750 mi/6,000 km
7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos
11,250 mi/18,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km
22,500 mi/36,000 km
26,250 mi/42,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km
37,500 mi/60,000 km
41,250 mi/66,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km
52,500 mi/84,000 km
56,250 mi/90,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km
67,500 mi/108,000 km
71,250 mi/114,000 km
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,E .
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Replace engine oil and filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 311 ).
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi
(24,000 km) under dusty conditions. Otherwise, use
Normal Conditions schedule.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system .
Inspect fuel lines and connections .
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace transmission fluid.
Replace dust and pollen filter .
Replace rear differential fluid .
276
4
2
3
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□□
□
□
□
＊＃
＃
＃
＊
＊
＊
＊
Maintenance
278
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement
information under special driving conditions.
Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if you
use your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailer towing, or
mainly in stop-and go driving. Otherwise, use the fluid
replacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions.
Necessary for proper break-in of the VTM-4 rear differential.
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
:
1:
2:
3:
4:
273
308
307
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water
pump.
Inspect valve clearance. Replace spark plugs.
Inspect idle speed . Do items in A, B, C, E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Replace engine coolant.
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km
82,500 mi/132,000 km
86,250 mi/138,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km
97,500 mi/156,000 km
101,250 mi/162,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km
112,500 mi/180,000 km
116,250 mi/186,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
•
•
1,
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
279
33,750 mi
37,500 mi
41,250 mi
45,000 mi
48,750 mi
52,500 mi
56,250 mi
60,000 mi
3,750 mi
7,500 mi
11,250 mi
15,000 mi
18,750 mi
22,500 mi
26,250 mi
30,000 mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
54,000 km
60,000 km
66,000 km
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
78,000 km
84,000 km
90,000 km
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
6,000 km
12,000 km
18,000 km
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
30,000 km
36,000 km
42,000 km
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
274
276
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
280
63,750 mi
67,500 mi
71,250 mi
75,000 mi
78,750 mi
82,500 mi
86,250 mi
90,000 mi
93,750 mi
97,500 mi
101,250 mi
105,000 mi
108,750 mi
112,500 mi
116,250 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
102,000 km
108,000 km
114,000 km
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
126,000 km
132,000 km
138,000 km
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
150,000 km
156,000 km
162,000 km
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
174,000 km
180,000 km
186,000 km
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page .
220
221
293
295
308
315
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
282
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Pour the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
CONTINUED
Adding Oil
Recommended Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
283
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
Additives
284
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Engine Oil
Maintenance
Changing the Oil and Filter
285
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
286
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
5.1 US qt (4.8
, 4.2 Imp qt)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing.
If it is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
287
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
up any spills immediately. Spilled
coolant could damage components
in the engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
Cooling System
Maintenance
288
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard.
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-
Honda coolant or plain water can
result in corrosion and deposits in
the cooling system.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Set the
Climate control system to 90°F
(32°C) or turn the temperature
control dial to maximum. Turn the
ignition off.
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Remove the radiator cap.
1. 3.
2.
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
289
DRAIN PLUG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant, then put the
tank back in its holder.
Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt in the back of the engine
block. Loosen the drain bolt.
6.
4. 5.
7.
Cooling System
Maintenance
290
DRAIN BOLT
RESERVE TANK
HOLDER
RESERVE
TANK CAP
7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
The cooling system capacity is:
10.
11.
12.
13.
9.
8.
Cooling System
Maintenance
291
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
1.74 US gal (6.6 , 1.45 Imp gal)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
duringnormaluse.Inbadweather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).65
On Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
292
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windshield washer
pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
To thoroughly flush the
transmission, the technician
should drain and refill it with
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive
the vehicle a short distance. Do
this three times. Then drain and
refill the transmission a final time.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
in the transmission.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the tube to
bring it to the upper mark. Always
use Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid). If it is not
available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
4.
Maintenance
Automatic Transmission Fluid
293
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt. Tighten
it securely. Tightening torque:
The differential should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level with the
differential at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
differential fluid filler bolt and
washer, and carefully feel inside the
bolt hole with your finger. The fluid
level should be up to the edge of the
bolt hole. If it is not, slowly add
VTM-4 Differential Fluid until it
starts to run out of the hole.
Maintenance
Differential Fluid
294
FILLER BOLT
CORRECT LEVEL
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Brake System
Brake Fluid
Maintenance
295
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Power Steering
Maintenance
296
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
Disconnect the cable from the air
cleaner housing cover by pushing
the plastic clip and pulling on it.
Remove the cable from the
connector.
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Loosen the four bolts with a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Replacement
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
297
CONNECTOR
BOLTS
CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover. Tighten the four bolts.
Reinstall the clip on the cover.
Clamp the cable with the
connector.
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
3.
4.
6.
5.
Maintenance
Air Cleaner Element, Hood Latch
Hood Latch
298
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
Clean off any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
The spark plugs in your vehicle are a
special platinum-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Remove the four bolts using a
hexagon socket wrench, then
remove the engine cover.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Replacement
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
299
HOLDING CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Use a wrench to remove the
hexagonsocketheadcapbolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
4. 5.
6.
7.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
300
HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Spark Plug Gap:
Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
NGK:
DENSO:
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Specifications:
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
301
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
PKJ16CR-L11
PZFR5F-11
0
0.1 mm
Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
battery monthly.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
Battery
Maintenance
302
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicle’s
electrical system.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
AUTO function of the driver’s
window will be disabled. You should
reset the AUTO function (see page
).
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).189
101
On EX model
Battery
Maintenance
303
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
vehicle’s electronic controls. Detach
the battery cables bef ore connecting
the battery to a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Raise the wiper arm off the
window.
Windshield: Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Front only:2.
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
304
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Front only:
Lower the wiper arm down against
the window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
6.
7.
4.
5.
3.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
305
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Your vehicle’s air conditioning is a
sealed system. Any major mainte-
nance, such as recharging, should be
done by a qualified mechanic. You
can do a couple of things to make
sure the air conditioning works
efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
362
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
306
AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
Check the condition of the two drive
belts (power steering belt and
alternator belt). Examine the edges
of each belt for cracks or fraying.
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
Power steering belt:
Thebeltshouldhavethefollowing
‘‘play’’ or deflection.
Check the tension of the power
steering belt by pushing on it with
your thumb midway between the
pulleys.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
climate control system becomes less
than usual. Have the dust and pollen
filter replaced by your Honda dealer.
Drive BeltsDust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts
307
POWER STEERING BELT
ALTERNATOR BELT
0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,aremore
prone to damage from road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated. The
following pages give more detailed
informationonhowandwhento
check air pressure, how to inspect
your tires for damage and wear, and
what to do when your tires need to
be replaced.
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regu-
larly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
InflationTiresTiming Belt
Timing Belt, Tires
Maintenance
308
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the vehicle has been
driven several miles), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the
vehicle before checking the tire
pressure, the tires can still be
considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
CONTINUED
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
309
P235/70R16 104S 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-
tors molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
These pressures are also given on
thetireinformationlabelonthe
driver’s doorjamb.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Inspection
Tires
Maintenance
310
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your vehicle’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
CONTINUED
Tire RotationMaintenance
Tires
Maintenance
311
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s han-
dling.
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
The tires that came with your
vehicle were selected to match the
performance capabilities of the
vehicle while providing the best
combination of handling, ride
comfort,andlonglife.Youshould
replace them with radial tires of the
same size, load range, speed rating,
and maximum cold tire pressure
rating (as shown on the tire’s
sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
tires on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
accuracy.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
312
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work inconsistently.
Wheel:
Tire:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle. Re-
placement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
364
CONTINUED
Winter DrivingWheels and Tires
Tires
Maintenance
313
16x61/2JJ
P235/70R16 104S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
youhearthemcomingincontact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your vehicle’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Snow Tires Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
314
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the operation of your vehicle’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicle’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
315
PARKING LIGHT/
SIDE MARKER
TURN SIGNAL/
PARKING LIGHT
HEADLIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the following:
Headlights
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Back-up lights
High-mount brake light
Hazard light function
License plate lights
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
363
Lights
Maintenance
316
SIDE MARKER LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
BACK-UP LIGHT
TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD LIGHT/
TAIL LIGHT
STOP/TAIL LIGHT
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its steel base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Open the hood.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming
Lights
Maintenance
317
CONNECTOR
BULB
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the bulb is right side
up and the nubs on the base fit
into the indentations in the
headlight assembly. Pivot the hold-
down wire back in place, and clip
the end into the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure one of its arrows is
pointing up.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To remove the front turn signal
bulb, push it in slightly and turn it
counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking Light Bulb
318
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the five holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender in place.
Install the five holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the center.1.
2.
3.
4.
8.
6.
7.
5.
Lights
Replacing a Front Side Marker
Light Bulb
Maintenance
319
HOLDING CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the two screws, then pull
the rear light assembly straight
back to remove it from the body.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,
turn signal/hazard lights, or side
marker light.
Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Push the socket into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Make sure all the wires are
correctly routed on the rear light
assembly, then install the
assembly on the body.
Open the tailgate.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
320
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on its left edge with a flat-
tip screwdriver.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out. Push a new bulb into
the socket.
Reinstall the lens, left side first.
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of back-up light cover.
Remove it by carefully prying in
the notch on its edge with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push a new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Reinstall the back-up light cover.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Replacing a Back-up light bulb
Lights
Maintenance
321
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The individual map lights, tailgate
light, and the vanity mirror lights
come apart the same way. They do
not all use the same bulb.
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Pull the light assembly out of the
tailgate.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push a new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Place a cloth on the middle edge
of a part of the lens on the
passenger’s side. Remove a part of
the lens by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw under the lens.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
322
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front individual map light:
Pry on the front edge in front of both
map lights.
Rear individual map light:
Pryontherearedgeofthelensin
the middle.
Tailgate light:
Pry on the upper edge to the left and
right of center.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
2.
3.
Lights
Maintenance
323
DOOR LIGHT
TAILGATE LIGHT
SUN VISOR LIGHT
GRAB RAIL LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Nonporous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your vehicle for 12
months or longer, have your Honda
dealer perform the inspections called
for in the 24 months/30,000 miles
(48,000 km) maintenance schedule
(Normal Conditions) as soon as you
take it out of storage (see page ).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.
285
274
Storing Your Vehicle
Maintenance
324
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you
informationonhowtocleanyour
vehicle and preserve its appearance:
the paint, brightwork, wheels and
interior. Also included are several
things you can do to help prevent
corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 326
.....................................Washing . 326
.......................................Waxing . 327
....................Aluminum Wheels . 327
..........................Paint Touch-up . 327
..................................Interior Care . 328
...................................Carpeting . 328
.................................Floor Mats . 328
.........................................Fabric . 329
...........................................Vinyl . 329
.......................................Leather . 329
...................................Seat Belts . 329
....................................Windows . 330
..........................Air Fresheners . 330
....................Corrosion Protection . 331
.................................Body Repairs . 332
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
325
Main Menu
Frequent washing helps preserve
your vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and grit
can scratch the paint, while tree sap
and bird droppings can permanently
ruin the finish.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area,
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is
parked in the sun, move it into the
shade and let the exterior cool down
before you start.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
cool water to remove loose dirt.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Wash the vehicle using the water
and detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).327
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
326
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
The radio antenna on your vehicle does
not need to be removed when you use a
‘‘drive-through’’ car wash. However, if
you remove the antenna, make sure to
reinstall it and tighten it securely using
an appropriate tool.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for
chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
Always wash and dry the whole
vehiclebeforewaxingit.Youshould
wax your vehicle, including the metal
trim, whenever water sits on the
surface in large patches. It should
formintobeadsordropletsafter
waxing.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Paint Touch-upWaxing
Aluminum Wheels
327
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
The Genuine Honda driver’s floor
mat that came with your vehicle was
designed to be hooked over the floor
mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
putitbackinyourvehicle.
If you replace it, use a genuine
Honda floor mat that is designed to
be used with the floor mat anchor in
your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Appearance Care
Interior Care
328
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethevehicle.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner. Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
CONTINUED
Vinyl Seat BeltsFabric
Leather
Interior Care
Appearance Care
329
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolor.
Ifyouusealiquidairfreshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Windows Air Fresheners
Interior Care
Appearance Care
330
The rear window def ogger wires are
bonded to the inside of the glass.
Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
dislodge and break the def ogger wires.
When cleaning the rear window, use
gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your vehicle:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
vehicle stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the vehicle.
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your vehicle. This
is especially important in areas
that use road salt in winter. It is
also a good idea in humid climates
and areas subject to salt air. Be
careful of the ABS wheel sensors
and wiring at each wheel.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your vehicle from
corroding by performing some
simple periodic maintenance:
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
331
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Body repairs can affect your vehicle’s
resistance to corrosion. If your
vehicle needs repairs after a collision,
pay close attention to the parts used
in the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Honda replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Honda body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Honda parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Take your vehicle to your authorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
332
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 334
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 335
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 342
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
........................Very Slowly . 342
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 342
................................Jump Starting . 343
............If Your Engine Overheats . 345
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 347
..........Charging System Indicator . 348
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349
...............Brake System Indicator . 351
..............................................Fuses . 352
..........Checking and Replacing . 353
......................Emergency Towing . 358
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
333
Main Menu
Your vehicle has a compact spare
tire that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your vehicle. Do not use your
sparetireonanothervehicle
unlessitisthesamemakeand
model.
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
334
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park. Apply the parking brake.
2.1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
335
JACK
SPARE TIRE
TOOLS
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the tailgate. Take the tools out of the storage
compartment.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Thetoolsandjackarebehinda
cover in the cargo area on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
pushing the top of the cover.
The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover on the
cargo area lining to access the
shaft for the spare tire hoist.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
336
COVER
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Put the wheel nut wrench on the
hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
Keep turning the wheel wrench to
create slack in the cable.
Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
11.
10.
8. 9.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
337
SPARETIREWRENCH
BRACKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
△
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Itis
pointed to by a mark molded
into the underside of the body.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
12. 13. 14.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
338
JACKING POINT
WHEEL WRENCH
EXTENSION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
15.
16. 17.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
339
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
Place the flat tire face up under
the hoist.
Slowly turn the wheel wrench
clockwisetotakeuptheslackof
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracketisseatedinthecenter
hole of the spare tire.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
until the flat tire rests against the
underbody of the vehicle and you
hear the hoist click.
Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
340
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover.
24.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
341
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
orNeutralorthestarterwillnot
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereisproba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
343
358
302
343
232
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If Your Engine Won’t Start
342
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To jump start your vehicle, follow
these directions closely:If your vehicle’s battery has run
down,youmaybeabletostartthe
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Your vehicle has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
You cannot start your Honda by
pushing or pulling it.
1.
2.
80
356
358
302
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
343
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
＋
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metal-
to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then the booster battery.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery. 5.
7.
3.
4.
6.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting
344
BOOSTER BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling/
climate control system and all
otheraccessories.Turnonthe
hazard warning indicators.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
Itmaygohigherifyouaredrivingup
a long steep hill on a very hot day. If
it climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Your vehicle can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats
If Your Engine Overheats
345
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
358
221 358
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If Your Engine Overheats
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
346
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood and check the oil
level (see page ). Although oil
levelandoilpressurearenot
directly connected, an engine that
is very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
1.
2.
3.
4.
220
283
358
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Emergency
Towing
347
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories:radio,heater,A/C,
climate control, rear defogger, cruise
control, etc. Try not to use other
electrically-operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running and take extra care not to
stall it. Starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Charging System Indicator
348
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator remains on past three
driving trips, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your vehicle if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
goes off after the engine starts. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause your vehicle to
put out excessive emissions.
Continued operation may cause
serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
driving trips. This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
349
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If possible, do not take your vehicle
for a state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. To check if
they are set, turn the ignition ON (II),
but do not start the engine. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information.(See page .)
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
371
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes
350
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the
vehicle begins to slow down, and you
will have to press harder on the
pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicle’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to
your dealer and have the brake
system inspected for leaks or worn
brake pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
The Brake System Indicator comes
on when you turn the ignition ON
(II). If the parking brake is not set, it
goes off after you start the engine. If
the parking brake is set, it goes off
when you fully release the parking
brake with the engine running.
295
358
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
351
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U. S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All the electrical circuits in your
vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in three fuse
boxes.
Theinteriorfuseboxesarelocated
underneath the dashboard on each
side.
Toopenthefuseboxonthe
passenger’s side, pull the right edge
of the cover.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
352
DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid (the diagram for the
driver’s side interior fuse box is on
the kick panel below the fuse box),
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check the component’s operation.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
The secondary fuse box is in the
engine compartment next to the
battery.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
locatedonthepassenger’ssideof
the engine compartment. To open it,
pushthetabsasshown. 1.
2.
356 357
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
353
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-HOOD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
5.4.3.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
354
BLOWN FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
6.
189
CONTINUED
On EX model
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
355
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
No.
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No.Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
40 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
ABS Motor
ABS F/S
Rear ACC Socket
4WD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Right Headlight
ACG S
Hazard
Not used
Stop
Left Headlight
Radio
Power Window Motor
Power Seat
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
30 A
40 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
120 A
30 A
7.5 A
50 A
Rear A/C
Heater Motor
Cooling Fan
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Battery
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
IGI Main
Not used
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
356
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊＊
−
−
−
＊
＊
Amps.No. Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.Circuits Protected
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
7.5 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
On Canadian models
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Not used
Daytime Running Light
Driver’s side Rear Power
Window
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Front Accessory Socket, Radio
Small Light
Interior Light, Navi
Power Door Lock
Back Up
Not used
Not used
Passenger’s Side Rear Power
Window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
20 A
Fuel Pump
SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Power Mirror, VTM-4
Daytime Running Light
ECU(PCM),CruiseControl
OPDS, Rear Wiper
ACC Relay
Back-up Lights, Instrument
Lights
Turn Signals
IG Coil
Front Wiper
Starter Signal
1 : Canadian models
1
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
357
Driver’s Side
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s Side
Front
Front
:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or,
ifyoubelongtoone,anorganization
that provides roadside assistance.
Never tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle with just a rope or
chain. It is very dangerous.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Any other
method of towing will damage the
drive system. When you contact the
towing agency, inform them that a
flat-bed is required.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
Refer to
on page
for non-emergency towing
information.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
cables lift that end of the vehicle off
the ground. Your vehicle’s
suspension and body can be
seriously damaged.
259
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel Lift Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
This is the only way to
transport your vehicle.
Never tow your vehicle with
wheel lift equipment.
Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome
This method of
towing your Pilot is unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
358
Towing a Pilot with only two tires on
the ground will damage parts of the
4WD system. It should be transported
on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 360
................................Specifications . 362
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 364
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 364
.................................Treadwear . 364
......................................Traction . 364
.............................Temperature . 365
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 366
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 367
.......................Emissions Controls . 368
.....................The Clean Air Act . 368
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 368
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 368
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 368
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 369
....................PGM-FI System . 369
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 369
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 369
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 369
....................Replacement Parts . 369
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 370
..............State Emissions Testing . 371
....Testing of Readiness Codes . 371
Technical Information
Technical Information
359
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
placetofindtheVINisonaplate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
Youcanseeitbylookingthrough
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label at-
tached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine com-
partment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
360
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
361
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
−− ＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
362
CapacitiesDimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
1.74 US gal (6.6 , 1.45 Imp gal)
2.25 US gal (8.5 , 1.87 Imp gal)
5.1 US qt (4.8 , 4.2 Imp qt)
4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)
5.8 US qt (5.5 , 4.8 Imp qt)
3.2 US qt (3.0 , 2.6 Imp qt)
8.2 US qt (7.8
, 6.9 Imp qt)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
19.3 US gal (73
, 16.1 Imp gal)
2.79 US qt (2.64 ,2.32Impqt)
188.0 in (4,775 mm)
76.3 in (1,938 mm)
70.6 in (1,793 mm)
4.8 US qt (4.5
, 4.0 Imp qt)
66.3 in (1,685 mm)
66.5 in (1,690 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
See the tire information label atta-
ched to the driver’s doorjamb.
9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)
ND-OIL8
106.3 in (2,700 mm)
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering fluid
cooler.
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
1:
2:
2
1
2
1
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Information
363
Tires
Alignment
Engine
FusesLights
Battery
60 W/55 W12 V
Size
Pressure
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
T155/90D16 110M
P235/70R16 104S
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 1°88’
0°50’
0°50’
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
10.0 : 1
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm
)
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Interior
Under-hood12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
V6 gasoline engine
Headlights
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal lights/
Parking lights
Rear side marker lights
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Stop/Taillights
Backup lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Individual map lights
Tailgate light
Vanity mirror light
Door (Courtesy) light
Grabrail lights
Console lights
12 V
12 V
12 V
5W
27 W/8 W
5W
21 W/5 W
21 W/5 W
21 CP (18 W)
5W
18 W
6.2 W
5W
1.1 W
3.8 W
Capacity 12 V 65 AH/20 HR
14 V
12 V 12.4 W
1.4 W
See page 357 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 357 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 356 or the fuse box
cover.
See spark plug maintenance
section page 301 .
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side(1157 NA)
(168)
(7443)
(7443)
(921)
(168)
(921)
(204)
(HB2)
(168)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Technical Information
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
364
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
Temperature A,B,C
365
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.MTBE
ETHANOL
METHANOL
Technical Information
Oxygenated Fuels
366
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Technical Information
Driving in Foreign Countries
367
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-
case Ventilation valve routes them
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
272
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
368
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lowerqualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
369
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Parkyourvehicleawayfromhigh
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma-
bles.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
370
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park.
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(approximately3
minutes).
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Technical Information
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
371
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines
the readiness codes are still not
set, see your Honda dealer.
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
372
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Relations
................................Information . 374
....................Warranty Coverages . 375
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 376
.....................Authorized Manuals . 377
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
373
Main Menu
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
360
Customer Relations Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
374
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Consumer Affairs Department
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
(787) 250-4318
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−
−
−
−−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
covers
your new vehicle, except for the
battery, emissions control systems,
and accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2003 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2003 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Honda Accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
New Car Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
375
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
376
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
３
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at
1-800-782-4356
(credit card orders only)
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
377
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61S9V00
61S9V00EL
61S9V30
31S9V600
31S9V700
31S9VQ00
HON-R
Form Description
2003 Honda Pilot
Service Manual
2003 Honda Pilot
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003 Honda Pilot
Body Repair Manual
2003 Honda Pilot
Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Pilot
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$10.00
FREE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
378
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 223
................................Accessories . 223
...Additional Safety Precaution . 224
............................Modifications . 224
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 82
............Accessory Power Sockets . 110
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 284
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 50
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 297
......Air Conditioning System . 118, 130
..............................Maintenance . 306
.....................Rear A/C Control . 135
.................................Usage . 118, 130
...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 120, 128
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 308
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 366
.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 327
......................................Antifreeze . 287
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
....................Indicator Light . 63, 243
...................................Operation . 242
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 153
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81
..........................Appearance Care . 325
................Audio System . 137, 153, 168
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 48
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 73
.............Automatic Speed Control . 207
..............Automatic Transmission . 233
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 362
...............Checking Fluid Level . 293
.......................................Shifting . 234
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 233
................Shift Lever Positions . 234
....................Shift Lock Release . 236
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 62, 348
............................Jump Starting . 343
..............................Maintenance . 302
............................Specifications . 363
..............................Before Driving . 215
....................................Belts,Seat .8,46
.........................Beverage Holders . 105
.................................Body Repairs . 332
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 242
.............Break-in, New Linings . 216
...........................................Fluid . 295
....................Bulb Replacement . 320
.......................................Parking . 104
.................System Indicator . 63, 351
........................Wear Indicators . 241
.............................Braking System . 241
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 216
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 73
........................Brights, Headlights . 72
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 321
..............................Brake Lights . 320
......................Cargo Area Light . 323
................Front Parking Lights . 318
........Front Side Marker Lights . 319
.................................Headlights . 317
..............Individual Map Lights . 322
...................License Plate Light . 321
.................................Rear Bulbs . 320
............................Specifications . 363
............Turn Signal Lights . 318, 320
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 317
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
................................Cancel Button . 209
............................Capacities Chart . 362
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
.............................Carrying Cargo . 225
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 181
...................Operation . 149, 160, 178
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..................CD Changer . 145, 165, 184
......................CD Player . 143, 163, 182
........................Certification Label . 360
............................................Chains . 315
Change Oil
........................................How to . 285
.............................When to . 274, 276
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 335
............Changing Engine Coolant . 289
...Charging System Indicator . 62, 348
............Checklist, Before Driving . 231
..................Childproof Door Locks . 87
.....................................Child Safety . 21
.......................................Child Seats . 21
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 297
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 327
...................................Carpeting . 328
......................................Exterior . 326
.........................................Fabric . 329
.......................................Interior . 328
.......................................Leather . 329
...................................Seat Belts . 329
...........................................Vinyl . 329
....................................Windows . 330
...............Climate Control System . 128
......................................Coat Hook . 111
.....................Code, Audio System . 189
........................CO in the Exhaust . 368
........................................Coin Box . 111
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 232
..............................Compact Spare . 334
...............Consumer Information . 374
.............Controls, Instruments and . 59
Coolant
........................................Adding . 287
....................................Checking . 221
.........................Proper Solution . 287
...................................Replacing . 289
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
....................Corrosion Protection . 331
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 368
............Cruise Control Operation . 207
Customer Relations
................................Information . 374
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 60
................Daytime Running Lights . 73
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 376
................Defogger, Rear Window . 77
......Defrosting the Windows . 125, 133
....................................Dimensions . 362
...............Dimming the Headlights . 72
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 293
..................................Engine Oil . 220
..........................Directional Signals . 74
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 241
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 286
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 82
....................Lockout Prevention . 83
......................Power Door Locks . 82
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 364
.....................................Drive Belts . 307
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 229
....................................Economy . 222
.........................In Bad Weather . 245
................In Foreign Countries . 367
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 307
...................................DVD Player . 190
..............................Economy, Fuel . 222
............Emergencies on the Road . 333
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 343
...........Brake System Indicator . 351
................Changing a Flat Tire . 335
.....Charging System Indicator . 348
..................Checking the Fuses . 353
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 347
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349
..................Overheated Engine . 345
.........................Emergency Brake . 104
......................Emergency Flashers . 76
......................Emergency Towing . 358
.......................Emissions Controls . 368
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68
.................................Drive Belts . 307
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 349
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 347
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 283
...............................Overheating . 345
............................Specifications . 363
............................Speed Limiter . 236
.......................................Starting . 232
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 366
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 368
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 369
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 326
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 329
..........................Fan, Interior . 118, 131
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 117
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 217
Filters
...............................................Air . 297
.......................Air Conditioning . 306
...............................................Oil . 285
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 335
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 293
..........................................Brake . 295
..........................Power Steering . 296
..................Windshield Washer . 292
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 176
...................Folding the Third Seat . 95
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 367
..........................Four-way Flashers . 76
.................................................Fuel . 216
......................Fill Door and Cap . 217
...........................................Gauge . 68
................Octane Requirement . 216
...............................Oxygenated . 366
........................Reserve Indicator . 65
........................Tank, Filling the . 217
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 353
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 222
..........................................Gasohol . 366
.........................................Gasoline . 216
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 65
...........................................Gauge . 68
................Octane Requirement . 216
........................Tank, Filling the . 217
................Gas Station Procedures . 217
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68
...............................................Fuel . 68
...............................Speedometer . 67
.................................Tachometer . 67
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 248
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 248
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 234
..............................Glass Cleaning . 330
........................................Glove Box . 88
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 248
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 317
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76
........................................Headlights . 72
........................................Aiming . 317
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 73
............Daytime Running Lights . 73
..................High Beam Indicator . 65
...........High Beams, Turning on . 72
............Low Beams, Turning on . 72
.........................Reminder Chime . 72
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 317
...................................Turning on . 72
..............................Head Restraints . 93
...............................Heated Mirror . 104
.....................Heating and Cooling . 118
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 232
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 72
HomeLink Universal
...............................Transmitter . 210
....................................Hood Latch . 298
.......................Hood, Opening the . 218
..................................................Horn . 71
.................................Hydroplaning . 246
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 360
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 79
...........................................Switch . 81
............Timing Control System . 369
........................Immobilizer System . 80
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61
..................Individual Map Lights . 114
.........................Infant Restraint . 26, 30
................................Infant Seats . 26, 30
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 308
.................................Inside Mirror . 102
.............................Inspection, Tire . 310
........................Instrument Panel . 2, 60
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73
...........................Interior Cleaning . 328
...............................Interior Lights . 112
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 338
.......................................Jack, Tire . 335
Index
GHI
J
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 79
..................................Maintenance . 269
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 281
.................................Record . 279-280
......................Required Indicator . 69
..........................................Safety . 270
.............................Schedule . 274-276
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 349
..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 91
...............................Meters, Gauges . 67
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 366
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 103
...................Neutral Gear Position . 235
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 216
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 360
..............................Paint Touch-up . 327
..............Panel Brightness Control . 73
........................Park Gear Position . 234
................................Jump Starting . 343
.......................Label, Certification . 360
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 46
....................Light Control Switch . 112
.............................................Lights . 315
....................Bulb Replacement . 317
.......................................Indicator . 61
.......................................Interior . 112
.........................................Parking . 72
..................................Turn Signal . 74
....................................Load Limits . 226
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81
............................Fuel Fill Door . 217
....................................Glove Box . 88
....................Lockout Prevention . 83
.................................Power Door . 82
........................Low Coolant Level . 221
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 65
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 347
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 362
.........................................Luggage . 225
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 216
.........................................Odometer . 67
...............................Odometer, Trip . 67
Oil
........................Change, How to . 285
..............Change, When to . 274, 276
......................Checking Engine . 220
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 347
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 284
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 82
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 367
............................Outside Mirrors . 102
....................Overheating, Engine . 345
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 281
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 366
Index
L
K
N
M
O
P
V
Main Menu
＊
...........................................Parking . 240
...............................Parking Brake . 104
.................................Parking Lights . 72
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 370
.............................PGM-FI System . 369
..................Polishing and Waxing . 327
................Power Seat Adjustments . 89
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
............................Protecting Adults . 12
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.......Protecting Larger Children . 38
.........Protecting Small Children . 35
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 42
.............................Using LATCH . 44
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 46
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 376
.................................Safety Features . 7
..........................................Air bags . 9
..................................Door Locks . 10
..........................Head Restraints . 10
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 46
...............Additional Information . 46
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 48
.....................................Cleaning . 329
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46
................................Maintenance . 49
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 46, 62
...................System Components . 46
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15
...................Radiator Overheating . 345
Radio/CD Sound
.......................System . 137, 153, 168
...............................Rear A/C Unit . 135
........Rear Entertainment System . 190
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 320
..........................Rear View Mirror . 102
.................Rear Window Defogger . 77
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 76
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 90, 91
...........Reclining the Second Seats . 92
................Reclining the Third Seat . 92
.............................Reminder Lights . 61
................Remote Audio Controls . 188
.......................Remote Transmitter . 84
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 297
.......................................Coolant . 289
................Engine Oil and Filter . 285
..........................................Fuses . 353
................................Light Bulbs . 317
............................Schedule . 274, 276
................................Spark Plugs . 299
................................Timing Belt . 308
...........................................Tires . 312
.............................Wiper Blades . 304
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 49
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 221
..................Reverse Gear Position . 235
................................Rotation, Tire . 311
Index
S
R
VI
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
.....................................Tachometer . 67
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 320
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 333
...................Tape Player . 149, 160, 178
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 364
.....Emissions Control Systems . 368
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 366
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 370
.......................Temperature Gauge . 68
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 48
........Testing of Readiness Codes . 371
............................Theft Protection . 189
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 370
....................................Timing Belt . 308
.................................................Seats . 89
............Folding the Second Seat . 94
...............Folding the Third Seat . 95
..........................Head Restraints . 93
.........Reclining the Second Seat . 92
............Reclining the Third Seat . 92
........................Rear Seat Access . 94
...............................Serial Number . 360
...........................Service Intervals . 272
...........................Service Manual . 377
.........Service Station Procedures . 217
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 234
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 233
........................Shift Lock Release . 236
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.........................Replacement in . 319
...............................Signaling Turns . 74
.....................................Snow Tires . 314
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 326
................Sound System . 137, 153, 168
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 334
............................Specifications . 363
....................................Spark Plugs . 301
....................Specifications Charts . 362
................................Speed Control . 207
...................................Speedometer . 67
..........SRS, Additional Information . 50
...Additional Safety Precautions . 55
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 53
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 50
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 52
........................SRS Components . 50
..................................SRS Service . 55
.............................SRS Indicator . 53, 62
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 82
.......................Starting the Engine . 232
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 232
................With a Dead Battery . 343
..............State Emissions Testing . 371
........Steam Coming from Engine . 345
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 78
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81
...Stereo Sound System . 137, 153, 168
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 324
........................Sunglasses Holder . 108
........................................Sun Visor . 109
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 55
.........................SRS Indicator . 53, 62
...................System Components . 50
..................................Synthetic Oil . 284
Index
T
VII
Main Menu
＊
....................................Tire Chains . 314
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 335
...............................................Tires . 308
..............................Air Pressure . 308
...................................Balancing . 311
.........................Checking Wear . 310
..........................Compact Spare . 334
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 364
......................................Inflation . 308
..................................Inspection . 310
...................................Replacing . 312
......................................Rotating . 311
...........................................Snow . 314
............................Specifications . 363
................................Tire Chains . 314
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 247
................Emergency Wrecker . 358
Your Vehicle Behind a
............................Motorhome . 259
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 293
...........................Fluid Selection . 293
..............Identification Number . 360
.............Shifting the Automatic . 233
.....................................Treadwear . 364
.......................................Trip Meter . 68
....................................Turn Signals . 74
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 335
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 331
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 333
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 364
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 216
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 328
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 286
................................Vanity Mirror . 109
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 226
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 362
....Vehicle Identification Number . 360
.............................Vehicle Storage . 324
.....................................Ventilation . 123
.................................................VIN . 360
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 329
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 284
..................................VTM-4 Lock . 238
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57
..................Warranty Coverages . 375
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 292
............................Level Indicator . 65
.....................................Operation . 76
.........................................Washing . 326
..................Waxing and Polishing . 327
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 78
............Alignment and Balance . 311
..........................Compact Spare . 334
......................................Wrench . 337
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 330
..................Operating the Power . 99
...........................Rear, Defogger . 77
Windshield
.....................................Cleaning . 330
...........................Defroster . 125, 133
.......................................Washers . 76
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 304
Index
V
W
U
VIII
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Front/Rear:
Compact Spare Tire:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page ).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
API Service SJ ‘‘Energy
Conserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20
viscosity (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
5.1 US qt (4.8
, 4.2 Imp qt)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
296
295
294
283
293
19.3 US gal (73 , 16.1 Imp gal)
Main Menu
